JP2017144044A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of executing a suitable initial operation.SOLUTION: A game machine is a game machine capable of playing a game, performs a returning operation for returning a movable accessory that performs operation to an origin position, and performs an initial operation of a movable accessory in a mode corresponding to the mode of the returning operation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 57

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine.

  There is a gaming machine that executes an initial operation process after executing an origin detection operation process (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-076173 A

  However, since the initial operation process is performed regardless of the mode of the origin detection operation process, a suitable initial operation may not be performed. The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can execute a suitable initial operation.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is made to solve the above-described problems, and is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1). , Electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74, top frame LED 9a, left frame LED 9b, right frame LED 9c, operation motors 60A to 60C for operating the movable members 51 to 54, movable The control means (for example, the production control microcomputer 120) for controlling the actuators 172A to 172D) for driving the members 173 and 175, and the electric components are driven in accordance with the control signal by the serial communication system from the control means. Output means (for example, a light emitter driver) that outputs a specific signal for output (for example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11). 411, a motor drive driver 412, an actuator drive driver 412A, and light emitter drivers 413a to 413c), and the output means includes specific signal output units (for example, driver output terminals Q0 to Q0) grouped in a plurality of different groups. Q23, Q0 to Q11) output a specific signal by a parallel communication system (for example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, as shown in FIG. 21, it is grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group. In the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, each group is grouped into 3 groups of 4 channels.), The output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group. Different (for example, as shown in FIG. 0 to Q23, output timings of output signals from Q0 to Q11 are distributed for each group), a movable accessory for performing the operation (for example, the operation is controlled by the CPU 120 for effect control shown in FIG. 51, A return operation (for example, FIG. 57 to FIG. 60) for returning the rotation mechanism 173A, the opening / closing mechanism 173B or the slide mechanism 173C of the movable accessory 173, the elevating mechanism 173D of the movable accessory 175, the movable members 51 to 54, and the like. The operation of returning to the origin position whose operation is controlled by the production control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 5), and the mode of the return operation (for example, the mode in which the rotation mechanism 173A does not perform the home position return operation in FIG. 57 or FIG. 58) 59 or 60, the rotation mechanism 173A performs the origin return operation, and the opening / closing mechanism 17 in FIG. 3B does not perform an origin return operation, and an aspect according to an embodiment in which the opening / closing mechanism 173B performs an origin return operation in FIG. 58 or FIG. 60 (for example, in FIG. 57 to FIG. 60, a rotation mechanism 173A or an opening / closing mechanism The initial operation of the movable accessory is such that the initial operation is not performed when 173B performs the home return operation, or the initial operation is performed when the rotation mechanism 173A or the opening / closing mechanism 173B does not perform the home return operation. (For example, the short initial operation shown in FIGS. 57 to 60) is performed (for example, including the mode of not performing the initial operation shown in FIG. 60). According to such a configuration, a suitable initial operation can be executed.

(Means 2) In the means 1, when the movable accessory is at the origin position before the return operation (for example, when the origin sensor 171A shown in FIG. 51 or the origin sensor 171B shown in FIG. 52 is in the ON state) (For example, as shown in FIG. 57, the rotating mechanism 173A is the initial operation in the operations (3) and (6), and the opening / closing mechanism 173B is the initial operation in the operations (4) and (5)). Etc.) may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the operation in the initial operation even if the movable accessory is at the origin position from the beginning.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the movable accessory that has performed the return operation does not perform the initial operation (for example, the rotating mechanism 173A that performs the operation (2) shown in FIG. 60 and (1) The opening / closing mechanism 173B that performed the above operation may not be configured to perform the initial operation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable initial operation by suppressing the time required for the operation check.

(Means 4) An initial operation (for example, the rotating mechanism 173A that performed the return operation of (1) in FIG. 59) that has performed the return operation in any one of the means 1 to 3. For example, in FIG. 59, the operations (4) and (7) of the rotation mechanism 173A are performed in the initial operation of other movable accessories (for example, (5) and (6) of the opening / closing mechanism 173B shown in FIG. 59). The operation may be performed in accordance with the operation or the like. According to such a configuration, a suitable initial operation according to the situation can be executed.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the operation of checking the movable accessory corresponding to the effect operation after performing the initial operation (for example, the operation of the movable accessory 173 shown in FIGS. 54 to 56). A long initial operation of the moving mechanism 173A, the opening / closing mechanism 173B or the slide mechanism 173C, and the elevating mechanism 173D of the movable accessory 175, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably confirm the production operation by performing the confirmation operation of the movable accessory.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the return operation is performed when the power is turned on (for example, the movable accessory initial operation process of step S151 executed by the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 45 is executed). 47) (for example, the timing shown in FIG. 47, which is executed by the effect control CPU 120, the timing of execution of the initial operation execution process during the demonstration in step S1014, etc.). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the rendering operation by performing the return operation other than when the power is turned on.

(Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the initial operation is a mixture of a plurality of operations (for example, (2) shown in FIG. 55 of the slide mechanism 173C controlled by the effect control CPU 120). And (3) leftward slide operation and rightward slide operation shown in FIG. 61, (4) to (6) horizontal slide operation shown in FIG. 61, etc.). . According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a suitable initial operation by suppressing the time required for confirming the plurality of operations of the movable accessory.

(Means 8) In any one of the means 1 to 7, the driving means (for example, the operation motors 60A to 60C and the actuators 172A to 172D) for operating the movable combination is used to output the specific signal of the same group of the output means. Driven based on a specific signal output from the unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 23, signals input to the same operation motor are connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group). And According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving unit.

(Means 9) In any one of the means 1 to 8, the output means outputs the output state when the input control signal is output to the other output means in a first output state in which the waveform rises in a predetermined manner (for example, The normal slew rate output state (see FIG. 19 (1))) and the second output state in which the waveform rises more slowly than the first output state (for example, the low slew rate output state (FIG. 19). (See (2))) (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output of the normal slew rate is set, and the S terminal is set to H (high)). If set, the output may be set to a low slew rate output (see FIG. 18). According to such a configuration, the setting can be changed according to the use environment, and the noise tolerance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased according to the setting.

(Means 10) In the means 9, another output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 16C. The control signal is sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board 16C), and the output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 22, the light emitter control). The light emitter driver 411 mounted on the substrate 16C may be configured such that the S terminal is set to H (high) and set to the low slew rate output state. According to such a configuration, when other output means is provided in the same substrate, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed.

(Means 11) In the means 9 or 10, the other output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided via the wiring member (for example, flexible cable, wire harness). (For example, as shown in FIG. 16 (2), the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 16D to 16F, and are mounted on the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F having different control signals. The output means are set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 24, mounted on the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F). In the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c, the S terminal is set to L (low) and set to the normal slew rate output state). It may be. According to such a configuration, when other output means is provided on another substrate connected via the wiring member, it is possible to increase noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

(Means 12) In any one of the means 1 to 11, the output means has a stop function (for example, time-out) for stopping the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the input of the control signal. (For example, the time-out function is set to an effective state by setting the T terminal to H (high). See FIG. 18). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an operation failure due to a wiring failure or the like, and to control the electrical component stably.

(Means 13) In the means 12, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal (for example, the production control microcomputer 120 performs the production control process (see step S65) at least for a predetermined period (this example). In this case, by repeatedly outputting a control signal every second), the lighting control of the plurality of light emitters, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74 is continuously executed. Or the motors 60A to 60C and the actuators 172A to 172D are controlled so as to be continuously executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize control corresponding to the stop function of the output means.

(Means 14) In the means 12 or 13, the output means can set the stop function to valid or invalid (for example, by setting the T terminal to L (low), the timeout function is set to an invalid state, The time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high) (see FIG. 18). According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting of the stopping function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce the cost by sharing parts.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the operation example of a production | presentation movable mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is a block diagram which shows the various circuits etc. which were mounted in the production control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a setting of the memory content. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the light-emitting body control board for performing lighting control of the several light-emitting body which comprises a light-emitting body. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting divided | segmented into a some block. It is a figure which shows the example of a connection setting of a serial output system and a light-emitting body block. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a light-emitting body driver. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a drive control board, and the structural example of the light-emitting body control board for performing lighting control of top frame LED9a, left frame LED9b, and right frame LED9c. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the slew rate setting of the through output of a clock signal and data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a control data format. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal in a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification in case the control signal which one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitter control board outputs is branched on the board. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the terminal of a connector, a harness, and input / output content. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start time winning process. It is the flowchart etc. which show an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation category determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game state transition process at the time of a change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a movable accessory initial action process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial stage operation execution process during a demonstration. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st production operation | movement using a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd and 3rd production operation | movement using a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of the 4th production operation | movement using a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the actuator A and the actuator C which operate a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the actuator B which operates a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of the actuator D which operates a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of the long initial operation | movement of a movable accessory using the actuator A and the actuator B. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the long initial operation | movement of a movable accessory using the actuator A and the actuator C. FIG. It is a figure which shows another example of the long initial operation | movement of a movable accessory using the actuator A and the actuator C. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the initial operation | movement A of a movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the initial operation | movement B of a movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the initial operation | movement C of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of operation | movement of the initial operation | movement D of a movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the coupling | bonding of the initial operation | movement of a movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, the actuator C, and the actuator D. FIG.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. In addition, in FIG. 1, the effect movable mechanism 50 mentioned later is shown with the broken line. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) and a second start winning opening are formed. When there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening, they are simply referred to as “start winning opening”.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter.

  In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening. In this way, the second start winning port as the second start area is in an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and in a normally open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game ball that has passed (entered) a winning opening such as a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) or a large winning opening (described later) is provided corresponding to each winning opening. The detection by the switches (first start port switch 22A, second start port switch 22B, count switch 23 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Of the “winnings”, winning at the starting winning port (first starting winning port or second starting winning port) is referred to as “starting winning”, and in particular, winning at the first starting winning port is referred to as “first starting prize”. The winning at the second starting winning opening is referred to as a second starting winning.

  Based on the occurrence of the first start winning (detection of game balls by the first start port switch 22A), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls and the first special figure holding memory number (to be described later) ) Is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), the first special symbol game (described later) executed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in the image display device 5 A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing the variable display game (described later) is satisfied.

  Further, based on the occurrence of the second start winning (detection of game balls by the second start port switch 22B), a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number If (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”), a second special symbol game (described later) executed in the second special symbol display device 4B or a decorative symbol executed in the image display device 5 is displayed. A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as variable display (described later) is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start prize and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second start prize may be the same number or different numbers. Good.

  The first special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not immediately executed at the time of occurrence of the first start winning and are temporarily suspended. Even if the first start condition for executing the variable display game such as the first special figure game (described later) and the decorative symbol variable display (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning prize, When the first start condition that permits the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition that is satisfied first is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). That is, the first special figure reserved memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in a waiting state. The number of first special figure holding memory decreases by one every time one first start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the first start condition by a certain first start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the first start winning in which the first start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the first starting winning is not satisfied. Is stored (held) as hold data (first special figure hold information) until the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held first special figure hold information is digested one by one every time the first start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the digested first special figure hold information is executed.

  The second special figure reserved memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not immediately executed when the second start winning occurs but are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing the variable display game such as the second special figure game (described later) or the variable display of decorative symbols (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning prize, When the second start condition permitting the start of the above-described variable display game due to the occurrence of a prize is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established previously is being executed) If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is put on hold (the variable display game is in a waiting state). In other words, the second special figure holding memory number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the waiting state for execution. The number of second special figure reservation storage decreases by one every time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start prize is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start prize which does not satisfy the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd start prize Is stored (held) as hold data (second special figure hold information) until a second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the second special figure hold information that has been put on hold is digested one by one every time the second start condition is satisfied, and a variable display game based on the second special figure hold information that is digested is executed.

  The reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is referred to as a “total reserved memory number”. When there is no particular distinction between the first special figure reserved memory number, the second special figure reserved memory number, and the total reserved memory number, it is usually simply referred to as “special figure reserved memory number” or “hold memory number”. , When simply referred to as “special figure hold memory number” or “pending memory number”, any one or two of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number It may be pointed to. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition”. The first special figure hold information and the second special figure hold information are also simply referred to as “special figure hold information” unless otherwise distinguished.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower part of the gaming area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 forms a big winning opening that changes between a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes, for example, a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. (Open state, closed state) is changed.

  As an example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 closes the grand prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, closes the big prize opening, and opens the big prize opening door when the solenoid 82 is in the on state. Open the grand prize opening. A game ball that has passed (entered) through the open big winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. In other words, winning the prize winning opening occurs by opening the winning prize opening.

  A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the occurrence of winning in the big prize opening (detection of game balls by the count switch 23). The number of winning balls (for example, 12) to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the big winning opening is the number of winning balls to be paid out (for example, 3) based on the occurrence of the first starting winning, and the second starting winning is More than the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, 3). That is, it greatly affects whether the state of the special winning opening (open state, closed state) is advantageous to the player. That is, when the grand prize opening is in an open state, more prize balls can be expected than when the grand prize opening is in a closed state. Therefore, when the big prize opening is in an open state, Is very advantageous to the player.

  In addition to or in place of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter), a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) may be provided.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A includes, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A displays (variably displays) a special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol (special symbol) variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is “ Also referred to as “second special figure”. A game executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  The first special symbol display device 4A (the same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B) has a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". Variable display of special symbols. Each special symbol is given a symbol number corresponding to each special symbol. As an example, each number indicating “0” to “9” is assigned with a symbol number “0” to “9”, and the symbol indicating “−” is assigned a symbol number “10”. That's fine. Note that the special symbols are not limited to those composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E in the alphabet) in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in a 7-segment LED are set in advance, as a special design It may be displayed.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (upper portions of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B). . The first hold indicator 25A includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the first special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the first special figure game) based on the hold data (first special figure hold information). A first on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the first special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the first special figure game is established by the establishment of a new first start condition. When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  The second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special figure hold memory number (the hold number of the second special figure game) based on the hold data (second special figure hold information). A second on-hold display is displayed for possible display. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of holdings of the second special figure game increases by 1 due to the establishment of a new second starting condition, the number of lighting is increased by one, and the holding of the second special figure game is held by the establishment of a new second starting condition When the number decreases by one, the number of lighting may be decreased by one.

  On the left side of the game area on the game board 2, a passing gate 41, a normal symbol display device 20, and a general figure hold display device 25 </ b> C are provided. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the number of common figure reservations (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”), the normal symbol display 20 A normal start condition for executing a general game (to be described later) executed at the above is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 displays (variably displays) variable symbols of ordinary symbols (also referred to as “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”), which are a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Note that a variable display game that variably displays a normal symbol is also referred to as a general game (or “normal game”). Note that information about a general game in which a general chart start condition is satisfied but a general chart start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as on-hold data (general map hold information).

  The general figure hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general figure hold storage number based on the hold data (general hold information) by, for example, the number of LEDs to be lit. The number of stored customary figures is the number of usual-purpose games that are temporarily executed without being executed immediately when a game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the general chart start condition for executing the general game is satisfied by the detection of the game ball by the gate switch 21, the general chart start condition for allowing the start of the general game is not satisfied ( For example, if the previously established ordinary game is being executed), the execution of the ordinary game is put on hold (the ordinary game is waiting to be executed). In other words, the number of usual-pending memories is the number of usual-purpose games that are in a waiting state. The number of stored ordinary maps is decremented by 1 each time one of the ordinary diagram start conditions is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified, are variably displayed. Variable display of decoration identification information (decorative symbols) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special symbol game (a special game using the first special symbol) executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or a second special symbol executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special game using the second special diagram), variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols is executed in the display area (decorative symbol display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the first special figure game or the second special figure game, that is, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any special figure of the first special figure or the second special figure game Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbol variation (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special symbol game, that is, in response to the special symbol stop display, the decorative symbols (determined decorative symbols, final symbols) that are variable display results in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. Stop symbol) is also displayed. That is, in the display area (decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5, the variation of the ornamental symbol is started in conjunction with (corresponding to) the first special symbol game (or the second special symbol game). Then, the fixed decoration symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  For example, there are eight kinds of decorative patterns (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”, Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. The character image may be composed of, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each decorative symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each decorative symbol. As an example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be attached to the alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  In addition, the stop display which stops the fixed special symbol which is a variable symbol display result (also referred to as a special symbol display result) and terminates the variable display, and the fixed symbol symbol which is a variable symbol display result (final stop) Stop display to stop the variable display and stop display to stop the variable display by stopping display of the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol (also referred to as the normal figure display result) Also referred to as a complete stop display, a final stop display, or a derived display (or simply “derived”). Note that the decorative pattern variation start timing and variation end timing do not necessarily coincide with the special symbol variation start timing and variation end timing, and within the special symbol variation time (special symbol variation time), As long as the fluctuation time is within.

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, or the variation end timing of the special symbol (the stop display timing of the confirmed special symbol) It may be later than (stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the display of the confirmed decorative symbol is stopped, and the final special symbol may be stopped and displayed when the execution of the predetermined effect is completed.

  Further, a stop display different from the complete stop display (final stop display, derived display) may be performed. For example, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative design until the fixed decorative design is derived and displayed. In the temporary stop display, a decorative pattern with a fluctuation speed of “0” is displayed while being stopped, for example, causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction, or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). This includes things that stop and display without causing time, slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  In addition, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first start prize storage display area 5HL and a second start prize storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the first hold indicator 25A, the first hold display for displaying the first special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. That is, the number of the first special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning memory display area 5HL, as in the second hold indicator 25B, the second hold display for displaying the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner is performed. In other words, the number of second special figure games that are currently suspended is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first hold display may be performed, for example, right-justified. In other words, when the number of holds of the first special figure game increases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL, the first start prize storage display A new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold information on the right side of the area 5HL (center side of the display area of the image display device 5), and the first start winning storage display area 5HL If there is another first hold display, the new first hold is displayed on the left side of the other first hold display (the left side of the leftmost first hold display if there are a plurality of other first hold displays). You may make it add a display. In addition, when there are a plurality of first hold indications in the first start winning memory display area 5HL, and the number of holds of the first special figure game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduced amount is displayed. Delete the first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning memory display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other first hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased first hold display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second hold display may be performed, for example, left-justified. That is, when the number of second special figure games held increases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second start win memory display area 5HR, the second start win memory display A new second hold display is added to the left side of the area 5HR (the center side of the display area of the image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special figure hold information, and the second start winning storage display area 5HR If there is another second hold display, the new second hold is displayed on the right side of the other second hold display (or on the right side of the rightmost second hold display if there are a plurality of other second hold displays). You may make it add a display.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold indications in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, if the number of holds in the second special figure game is reduced due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second reduced amount is stored. Delete the second hold display (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning memory display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special figure hold information; Each of the other second hold displays is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). Note that the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second start prize storage display area 5HR are also simply referred to as “start prize storage display area 5H” unless otherwise distinguished.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, in addition to the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR, the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second as the hold display area. The hold display erased (moved) from the start winning memory display area 5HR (that is, the first special figure hold information digested by the establishment of the first start condition and the second display digested by the establishment of the second start condition) Active display area AHA displaying a special image representing information including active display (also called digestion display, current display) corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of decorative symbols executed based on the special map hold information (Digestion display area, digestion display area, current hold display area, current hold display area, active hold display area, active hold display area, active display Frequency, time display area, this display area, also referred to as digestion time display.) Is, for example, between a first start winning storage display area 5HL second start winning storage display area 5HR is disposed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is arranged between the first start-winning memory display area 5HL and the second start-winning memory display area 5HR. The display area AHA only needs to be arranged at any position in the display area of the image display device 5. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, an active display frame that surrounds the active display, an active display or an active display, or an active display such as a character or an image displayed around the active display frame Information corresponding to the display is displayed by a special image.

  In addition to the above configuration, the game area of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered any of the general prize opening is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are installed at the lower left and right oblique parts of the upper plate (the upper left and right oblique parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR will be simply referred to as speakers 8 unless otherwise distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a production sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and outputs a warning sound according to the situation of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The production sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, BGM, a song, etc. that are output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, voice (serif, message), or the like that is output in accordance with a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of a winning at the first start winning opening, etc.). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is output in response to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the production sound is, for example, a sound or voice for requesting an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound, voice, Sound, voice, or the like that notifies or suggests that the game will shift to the jackpot gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound that is output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound that is output when the glass door (not shown) is open, or the like. .

  A movable accessory 173 and a movable accessory 175 are provided inside the game area of the gaming machine frame 3. The movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 perform predetermined operations in the area of the gaming machine frame 3 as production operations. FIG. 1 shows a case where the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 are at the origin position. As an effect operation, the movable accessory 173 ascends to the right diagonally upward from the origin position, stops at the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as an operation end, and hides a part of the display screen of the image display device 5. Then, the operation of returning to the origin position is performed again. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 48 and the like, the movable accessory 173 performs an effect operation that splits into a plurality of parts after moving to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5. Further, the movable accessory 175 descends from the origin position as an effect operation, stops at the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as an operation end, hides a part of the display screen of the image display device 5, and again returns to the origin. Move back to the position. In addition, the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 may perform an operation of stopping and returning to the origin position again without moving from the origin position to the center of the display screen, which is the operation end, as an effect operation. . The movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 may be selectively executed as a production operation of a strong operation that repeats a violent movement operation and a weak operation that is gentler than the strong operation. Further, when the movable accessory 173 operates, an effect operation of lighting a light emitting member 9CC described later may be performed.

  A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC and the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed on the movable accessory 175 at the left and right positions of the image display device 5, A left frame LED 9 b and a right frame LED 9 c are installed at the left and right positions of the machine frame 3. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9a, 9b, and 9c are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless particularly distinguished. For example, the lamp 9 may be composed of one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The top frame LED 9a may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7) in the game area.

  The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like described above are rendering devices that perform rendering, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes other rendering devices such as a device having a vibration unit and a device having a blower. It may be.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each component is an example, and may be arranged at other positions. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area. Further, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  The game board 2 is provided with an effect moving mechanism 50 as a movable member capable of executing a display effect in a lighting manner of a plurality of light emitters arranged in an aligned manner. The effect movable mechanism 50 has a plurality of (for example, four) movable members. The effect movable mechanism 50 may change between a retracted state in which a plurality of movable members are positioned separately on the top and bottom of the screen of the image display device 5 and an advanced state in which the plurality of movable members are positioned in front of the screen of the image display device 5. it can. In the following description, the up / down / left / right and front / rear directions will be described with reference to the state of facing the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The effect movable mechanism 50 shown in FIG. 1 is for the retracted state. In this embodiment, the game area of the game board 2 is constituted by a transparent plate (not shown) made of, for example, resin, and the effect movable mechanism 50 is arranged behind the transparent plate, and the game ball is produced by the effect. It flows down in front of the movable mechanism 50. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and at least one of the plurality of movable members of the effect movable mechanism 50 may be disposed in front of the transparent plate forming the game area.

  FIG. 2 shows an operation example of the effect moving mechanism 50. The effect movable mechanism 50 includes an upper mechanism including two movable members 51 and 52 positioned on the upper side of the screen of the image display device 5 in the retracted state, and two movable members positioned on the lower side of the screen of the image display device 5 in the retracted state. It can be separated into a lower mechanism including the members 53 and 54. That is, the effect movable mechanism 50 is configured to include an upper mechanism and a lower mechanism that can be arranged apart from or close to each other. When the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are separated from each other, the retracted state as the first state is established. On the other hand, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are close to each other, the advancing state as the second state is obtained. The upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are provided with drive means for changing between a retracted state and an advanced state. Each of the movable members 51 and 52 is pivotally supported by a decoration member 57 at the left end, and is configured to be rotatable with respect to the decoration member 57. The decoration member 57 moves up and down with the operation of the movable member 51 by outputting the power from the operation motor 60 </ b> A shown in FIG. 3 to the movable member 51.

  The movable member 51 includes a front surface portion and a base body disposed behind the front surface portion, and holds the movable member 52 between the front surface portion and the base body. The movable member 52 receives the power from the operation motor 60B shown in FIG. The motor 60B for operation should just be attached to the front surface of the base body with which the movable member 51 is provided. The operation motor 60B provides a driving force for driving the movable member 52 to be operable. The movable members 53 and 54 are connected to a predetermined link mechanism or the like, and are moved up and down by transmitting power from the operation motor 60C shown in FIG. 3 via a power transmission unit or the like engaged with the link mechanism. However, it can be rotated around the left end.

  A movable member position sensor 61 shown in FIG. 3 is provided at a predetermined position of the effect movable mechanism 50. The movable member position sensor 61 may be any sensor that can directly or indirectly detect the states of the movable members 51 to 54 and the decorative member 57. As an example, the movable member position sensor 61 may include first to third position sensors provided corresponding to the operation motors 60A to 60C. Each of the first to third position sensors is configured by using a photo interrupter, a rotary encoder, and the like. From the operation states of the corresponding operation motors 60A to 60C, for example, the positions of the movable members 51 to 54 and the decoration member 57 are referred to. As long as the states of the movable members 51 to 54 and the decorative member 57 can be detected. As a specific example, the first position sensor detects the rotation amount of the rotation shaft of the operation motor 60A, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 60A. A position detection signal capable of specifying the operation positions of the movable members 51 and 52 and the decorative member 57 is output. The second position sensor detects the amount of rotation about the rotation shaft of the operation motor 60B, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 60B, thereby moving the movable member relative to the movable member 51. A position detection signal capable of specifying the relative operation position of 52 is output. The third position sensor detects the rotation amount of the rotation shaft of the operation motor 60C, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 60C, thereby allowing the movable members 53 and 54 to move. A position detection signal capable of specifying the operation position is output.

  As another example, the movable member position sensor 61 may include first to fifth position sensors provided corresponding to the movable members 51 to 54 and the decorative member 57, respectively. The first to fourth position sensors are provided corresponding to the movable members 51 to 54, respectively, and the fifth position sensor is provided corresponding to the decorative member 57, each of which is a photo interrupter, a linear encoder, and other infrared sensors. What is necessary is just to be comprised using. Thereby, the 1st-5th position sensor should just detect the operation state etc. of the corresponding movable members 51-54 and the decoration member 57, and should just output the position detection signal etc. according to the detection result. As described above, the movable member position sensor 61 may include a plurality of position sensors provided corresponding to the plurality of movable members.

  In each of the movable members 51 and 52, a plurality of light emitters are arranged in alignment along a predetermined direction such as a vertical and horizontal direction (up and down, left and right directions). The plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the movable member 51 constitutes a light emitter unit 71 among the light emitter units 71 to 74 shown in FIG. The plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the movable member 52 constitute a light emitter unit 72 of the light emitter units 71 to 74 shown in FIG. As described above, each of the movable members 51 and 52 includes a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix.

  The plurality of light emitters arranged so as to form the light emitter units 71 and 72 each include a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different light emission colors. For example, as each light emitter, a full color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is used. As a result, the movable member 51 and the movable member 52 emit light from the light emitting unit 71 such as rainbow color display by displaying various colors in a single color as well as displaying a plurality of colors separately in the region. It is possible to execute a display effect in a lighting manner of a plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged in the body unit 72. Thus, the light emitter unit 73 and the light emitter unit 74 can change the color or pattern of display (light emission) using a plurality of light emitters over time, and can execute a display effect. In front of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the light emitter units 71 and 72 included in the movable members 51 and 52, a partition body formed in a lattice shape so as to partition each of the plurality of light emitters is provided. ing. A front plate for decorating the movable members 51 and 52 is provided on the front surface of the partition of the movable members 51 and 52.

  Similar to each of the movable members 51 and 52, the movable members 53 and 54 each include a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix. That is, in each of the movable members 53 and 54, a plurality of light emitters are arranged in alignment along a predetermined direction such as a vertical and horizontal direction (up and down, left and right directions). The plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged by the movable member 53 constitute a light emitter unit 73 among the light emitter units 71 to 74 shown in FIG. The plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the movable member 54 constitute a light emitter unit 74 among the light emitter units 71 to 74 shown in FIG.

  The plurality of light emitters arranged so as to constitute the light emitter units 73 and 74 each include a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different light emission colors. For example, as each light emitter, a full color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is used. As a result, the movable member 53 and the movable member 54 emit light from the light-emitting unit 73, such as rainbow color display by displaying various colors in a single color in addition to displaying a plurality of colors in a single region. A display effect can be executed by the lighting mode of the plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged in the body unit 74. Thus, the light emitter unit 73 and the light emitter unit 74 can change the color or pattern of display (light emission) using a plurality of light emitters over time, and can execute a display effect. In front of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment by the light emitter units 73 and 74 included in the movable members 53 and 54, a partition body formed in a lattice shape so as to partition each of the plurality of light emitters is provided. ing. A front plate for decorating the movable members 53 and 54 is provided on the front surface of the partition of the movable members 53 and 54.

  Note that the plurality of light emitters are not limited to those using full-color LEDs, and for example, single-color or multi-color LEDs may be used, or light emitters other than LEDs may be used. The partition may be configured by a member that is three-dimensionally formed in a lattice shape, or may be configured, for example, by forming a lattice-shaped pattern on a transparent or translucent plate material by printing or cutting. . The partition is not limited to one configured to partition a plurality of light emitters one by one, and may be configured to partition a plurality of light emitters by a predetermined number, or may be configured in a predetermined direction (for example, lateral direction). And the vertical direction). Furthermore, such a partition may not be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2A, the movable members 51 to 54 do not overlap the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 in the retracted state in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are separated from each other. . At this time, each of the movable members 51 and 52 is positioned above the image display device 5, and the movable member 52 is positioned behind the movable member 51. Become. In addition, each of the movable members 53 and 54 is positioned below the image display device 5 and the movable member 53 is positioned behind the movable member 54, so that the player cannot visually recognize or difficult to view the movable member 53. . Thus, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are in the retracted state, the display screen of the image display device 5 becomes visible.

  As shown in FIG. 2B, the movable members 51 to 54 overlap the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 in the advanced state where the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are close to each other. When changing from the retracted state to the advanced state, the movable member 52 moves downward with rotation from the back side of the movable member 51, and the movable member 53 moves upward with rotation from the back side of the movable member 54. To do. The movable member 51 moves downward with the movement of the movable member 52, and the movable member 54 moves upward with the movement of the movable member 53. Thus, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are in the advanced state, the display screen of the image display device 5 is difficult to view or cannot be viewed.

  When the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are in the retracted state, as shown in FIG. do not do. On the other hand, when the upper side mechanism and the lower side mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are in the advanced state, as shown in FIG. Match. Thus, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are in the advanced state, the movable members 51 are aligned by aligning the arrangement directions of the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with the movable members 51 to 54, respectively. A sense of unity can be given to the display effects in each of .about.54. In particular, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 50 are in the advanced state, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect by executing an integral display effect with the plurality of movable members 51 to 54. Moreover, since the visibility with respect to the display screen of the image display apparatus 5 changes with the position of the several movable members 51-54, it can prevent that an effect becomes monotonous and can improve the interest of an effect.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the general symbol display 20 starts the general game based on the fact that the general diagram start condition is satisfied after the general diagram start condition is satisfied. In the regular game, after the variable display of the normal symbol is started (after the change of the normal symbol is started), the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol after a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses. Is stopped (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (symbol per symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed normal symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a special game (first special game) is started by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied. A special game (second special game) is started by the second special symbol display device 4B on the basis that the second start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. In the special figure game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started (after the change of the special symbol is started), when the variable display time as the special figure change time elapses, the fixed special that becomes the variable display result of the special symbol Derives and displays a symbol (special image display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes “big hit” as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big bonus symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, “ It will be “losing”. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the “small hit” as the predetermined display result may be used.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol in the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is a specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 executes a round (also referred to as “round game”) advantageous for the player a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds) in the big hit gaming state. The round is the opening cycle of the big prize opening. In addition, after the variable display result in the special game is “small hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the small hit game state which is a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 opens and closes the big prize opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round (each round) after the variable display result in the special game becomes “big hit”, and wins a big prize. The mouth state (open state, closed state) is changed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state at the start of the round, and then changes the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 opens the grand prize opening door at the start of the round and keeps the grand prize opening open, and then closes the grand prize opening door and keeps the grand prize opening closed. End the round.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 changes the big prize opening to the open state once per round (changes the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state during one round). In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the big prize opening to the open state a plurality of times per round. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the grand prize opening to an open state twice per round (during the round, the grand prize opening is open → closed → open → closed) May change with the state).

  In addition, the grand prize opening is maintained in the closed state instead of the aspect in which the round is started by changing the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state as described above (the aspect in which the grand prize opening door is immediately opened at the start of the round). It may be a mode in which the round starts (a mode in which the grand prize opening door is not opened at the start of the round). That is, the pachinko machine 1 keeps the grand prize opening closed without opening the grand prize opening door at the start of the round, and then opens the grand prize opening door and keeps the grand prize opening open. Alternatively, the grand prize opening door may be closed to end one round.

  The predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) in which the round is executed in the big hit gaming state may not be a fixed (constant) number of times (for example, always 10 times). For example, the predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) in which the round is executed in the big hit gaming state is any one selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 2, 8, 16) It may be the number of times.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the jackpot gaming state, the number of executions of the round is the upper limit number (if the predetermined number is a fixed number, the fixed number is selected from a plurality of types. Repeat the round until the selected number of times is reached. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 ends the execution of the round when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a prize winning opening) even before the number of rounds reaches the upper limit. May be.

  In the round, the big prize opening is either a predetermined time (opening period) after opening the big prize opening door, or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winnings to the big prize opening occurs. It is maintained in an open state until the period until. The predetermined time (open period) during which the prize winning opening is maintained in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 29 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (open period) during which the prize winning opening is maintained in the open state in the round is any one selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 0.1 seconds and 29 seconds). It may be time.

  In the round, the big prize opening is maintained in a closed state (closed state in the round) until a predetermined time (closed period) elapses. For example, in the case of a mode in which the round starts with the grand prize opening being changed from the closed state to the open state, the grand prize opening is until a predetermined time (closing period) has elapsed after the grand prize opening door is closed. Stay closed for a period of time. Further, for example, in the case of a mode in which a round starts with the grand prize opening maintained in a closed state, the big prize opening is in a closed state for a period until a predetermined time (closing period) elapses after the round starts. Maintained. The predetermined time (closing period) during which the grand prize winning opening is kept closed in the round may not be a fixed (constant) time (for example, always 3 seconds). For example, the predetermined time (closing period) during which the grand prize winning opening is maintained closed in the round is any time selected (lottery) from a plurality of types of times (for example, 1 second, 3 seconds). There may be.

  From the above, in the big hit gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes, for example, each round of changing the big prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds), or opens the big prize opening. Each round of changing from state (29 seconds) to closed state (3 seconds) is executed 16 times, or the grand prize opening is opened (0.1 seconds) → closed state (1 second) → open state (0.1 Each round that is changed from (second) to closed state (one second) can be executed twice. Also, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the big hit gaming state performs the round of changing the grand prize opening from the open state (29 seconds) to the closed state (3 seconds) eight times and then opens the big prize port (0. It is also possible to execute each round changing from 1 second) to closed state (1 second) eight times.

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, a round having a relatively long predetermined time (opening period) in which the big prize opening is in an open state (for example, a round in which the open state is 29 seconds) is also referred to as a normal open round. A round in which the predetermined time (opening period) for which the big prize opening is in an open state is relatively short (for example, a round in which the open state is 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the normal opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the normal opening round jackpot symbol. . Of the special symbols that are jackpot symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the short-term opening round (the jackpot symbol controlled to the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed later) may be referred to as the short-term opening round jackpot symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state (normal open big hit state) controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the normal open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). Also, in the big hit gaming state (short term open big hit state) controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as a definite special symbol in the special figure game, the short-term open round is executed a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). The If the number of executions of the normal opening round is larger in the normal opening big hit state than the short opening big hit state, the short opening is executed in addition to the normal opening round in the normal opening big hit state. In the big hit state, a normal opening round may be executed in addition to the short-term opening round.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the value obtained by the player in each jackpot game state as the jackpot game state controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, that is, the game It is possible to prepare (realize) various jackpot gaming states with different degrees of advantage (for example, the number of winning balls (number of balls)) viewed from the player.

  As an example of the case where the short-term free round is not used, the round is advantageous to the player over the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times and the jackpot gaming state in which the round (normally open round) is executed eight times. A jackpot gaming state in which (normally open round) is executed 16 times can be prepared. In the above example, if there is no difference in the number of times that the winning prize opening is changed to the open state in each round (normally open round) or the time (open time) of each open state, the round (normally open round) is determined. In the big hit gaming state executed 16 times, it is possible to expect twice as many balls as the big hit gaming state executed eight times (normally open round).

  As an example of using short-term open rounds, a jackpot gaming state (actually eight rounds of jackpot gaming state) in which eight short-term open rounds are executed after executing eight regular opening rounds, and a bonus game state of substantial eight rounds. It is possible to prepare a big hit gaming state in which a normal open round is executed 16 times, which is advantageous to the player. In the above example, there is no difference in the number of times that the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each normal open round, and the time (open time) of each open state, and the number of items that can be obtained in the short-term open round If it is so small as to be negligible, in the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed 16 times, it is possible to expect a double play in the big hit gaming state of 8 rounds.

  In addition, even if the predetermined time (opening period) has not elapsed after the grand prize opening door has been opened, the big prize opening will change from the open state to the closed state if a predetermined number of winnings are made to the big prize opening. However, the value obtained by the player may be varied by providing a difference in the predetermined number. For example, a big hit gaming state in which the above-mentioned predetermined number is set to 5 and the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds) is executed 8 times, and the normal opening round (the opening time is 29 seconds) is set to 8 above. A jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round (opening time is 29 seconds), in which the predetermined number is 10, which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot gaming state to be executed once, may be prepared.

  Further, the value obtained by the player may be made different by providing a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of winning in the special winning opening. For example, it is more advantageous for the player than the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times and the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round with 6 prize balls is executed 16 times. A big hit gaming state in which a normal open round with 12 award balls is executed 16 times may be prepared.

  Further, in addition to the value obtained by the player by the jackpot gaming state itself (value obtained by the player during the jackpot gaming state), the type of state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the jackpot gaming state (for example, , Normal state, time-short state, probability change state) and the period (eg, time-short state, probability change state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controlled after the big hit game state (for example, the number of time reductions, ST The value obtained by the player after the jackpot gaming state may be varied by varying the number of times).

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled after the 8R probability variable big hit (described later) is set as the big hit gaming state that is controlled after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. A big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed 8 times and a big hit gaming state in which the normal open round controlled after the 16R probability variable big hit (described later) is executed 16 times are prepared.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R arranged in the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the start of any special figure game of the game, the variable display of decorative symbols is started. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is a specific variable during the period from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of variable display by the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol. There may be a predetermined reach state that constitutes a part of the display combination.

  The reach state is a decorative symbol that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination (also referred to as “reach variation symbol”). Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In the following description, reaching a reach state is also referred to as reach establishment (reach establishment).

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8, the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9, or the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory It may be included that the operation (stationary, fine movement, movement, etc.) of the object 175 or the like is different from the operation mode before the reach state.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the production pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach production may be varied (also referred to as “hit expectation” or “hit reliability”). As a result, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect appears. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach that has a higher degree of expectation of jackpot than normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  Note that the degree of expectation of jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (the jackpot (Probability that the effect is executed at times other than time) × (probability of not winning the jackpot)} (when the expectation degree of jackpot is “1”, the variable display result is always “hit”).

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, as one aspect of the variable display effect, a slip effect or a pseudo-continuous effect realized by a variable display operation such as a decorative symbol can be executed. In the slide effect, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols at, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area) in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, or both), the decorative symbol is changed again, and then the stop symbol is displayed, thereby performing the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed. Thus, in the slide effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed until a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed after variable display of the decorative symbols is started, and then variable for a predetermined number of decorative symbols. By executing the display again, there are a case where the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state and a case where the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state.

  In the pseudo-continuous production, in response to the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once, the fixed decoration that becomes a variable display result after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Before the symbols are derived and displayed, all of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, a predetermined pseudo-continuous chance is a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). Or temporarily displayed), in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a re-variable display, which is an effect display for starting variable display of all the decorative symbols, is performed in a predetermined manner. Times (for example, up to 4 times).

  The number of re-variable displays (number of re-variable displays) in the pseudo-continuous effect is the number of variable displays (first variable display) until all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped for the first time in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R ( 1), the number of re-variable displays (final variable display) after all decorative symbols have been temporarily stopped (last time), and the number X of re-variable displays between the first variable display and the last variable display ( X is 0 or 1 or more), and the number of times (X + 1) is less than the number of times (X + 2). The number of re-variable display times is the same as the number of times that all decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (the number of temporary stops). The first variable display to the first temporary stop display are also referred to as the first pseudo-continuous, the second variable display (first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display are also referred to as the second pseudo-continuous, The third variable display (second revariable display) to the third temporary stop display are also referred to as the third pseudo-ream, and the fourth variable display (third revariable display) to fourth temporary stop display. This is also called the fourth pseudo-ream. In addition, the number of pseudo-continuations in the pseudo-continuous production is also referred to as the number of pseudo-series fluctuations (or the number of pseudo-series). That is, the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations, the number of re-variable display times, and the number of temporary stops are the same. The increase in the number of pseudo-continuations such as the first, second, third,... Is also referred to as “the pseudo-continuation continues”.

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the re-variable display (re-variation) is performed once to four times, so that the decoration pattern is variable based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once. The display can appear as if it were started 2-5 times in a row. In the present embodiment, an example in which revariable display (revariation) is performed once or twice (see FIG. 6) is shown, but revariable display (revariation) may be performed three or more times.

  In the pseudo-continuous effect, before reaching reach in the change (before reaching the reach state), the pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily displayed in any or all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As shown, the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped, or after reach is established, any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped. The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be temporarily stopped so that the pseudo consecutive chances are temporarily stopped and displayed. That is, the temporary stop display effect mode in the pseudo-continuous effect includes at least an effect mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before the reach state is reached, and an effect mode in which the chance symbol is temporarily stopped after the reach state is reached. May be. The chance symbol can be stopped and displayed even when the reach state is not reached.

  The slip effect (similar to the pseudo-ream effect) is a notice or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach effect, or a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high. May be. Hereinafter, an effect for giving a notice or suggestion to a player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed or that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high may be collectively referred to as a notice effect. In addition to the slip effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, the notice effect may use a variable display operation different from the slide effect and the pseudo-continuous effect. For example, a background image display, a message window display, etc. There may be those that use an effect operation different from the variable display effect, such as hold display, audio output, and light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing).

  Note that a variable display effect (variable display operation) different from the slip effect and the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed as the notice effect. For example, change start timing (for example, when the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol start changing at the same time, start timing at the same time, or when the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol do not start changing at the same time. For the first time the symbol that starts to change is the timing at which the change starts, etc.) and the effect that makes the change start order of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol different from the normal time May be executed as In addition, a display operation other than the variable display operation may be executed as a notice effect. For example, an effect that makes the background image different from the normal time or an effect that makes the hold display different from the normal time may be executed as the notice effect. The notice effect may be due to an operation other than the display operation. For example, the notice effect may be based on sound output from the speaker 8, light emission from the lamp 9, operation of the movable accessory 173, and the like.

  The notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the notice effect or the content suggested by the notice effect is realized. For example, a notice effect that notifies or suggests to a player that the variable display state of a decorative pattern due to winning of a certain game ball may become a reach state has at least a variable display state of the decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball. What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before entering the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect that notifies or suggests to the player that the variable display result due to winning of a certain game ball may be a “hit” is because at least the confirmed decorative pattern due to winning of the game ball is stopped and displayed May be executed (started) before.

  The notice effect may include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-determined notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display results in a “big hit” based on the hold information of the special-purpose game before starting the variable display subject to the notice. (Prefetching) is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as target hold information, and the first hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target first hold display and corresponds to the target hold information. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as a target second hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is also referred to as a target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the target hold information (when the target hold information including the variable display of the target is being digested) and before the target hold information. There are a case where the processing is executed while the holding information is being digested and a case where the processing is executed while the target holding information is being digested, and while the holding information before the target is being digested.

  The stage action that becomes a pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball is that the player determines whether or not the content of the pre-reading notice effect is realized after winning the game ball (after the start condition is established). Anything may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, a stage action that is a pre-reading advance notice for informing (indicating) to a player that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state due to a winning of a certain game ball, Any variable display state may be executed (started) before the reach state (or the non-reach state) is reached. In addition, at least a play operation of a pre-reading notice effect for informing (suggesting) a player that a variable display result may be a “hit” by winning a game ball What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before the winning decorative symbol by winning is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, as a pre-reading notice effect (preliminary notice effect), a hold effect according to the display mode of the first hold display in the first start prize storage display area 5HL and the second hold display in the second start prize storage display area 5HR is prepared. It may be. The holding effect includes a first hold display added to the first start winning memory display area 5HL when the first start winning occurs, and a second hold display added to the second start winning memory display area 5HR when the second start winning occurs. Are displayed in a notice mode (addition effect at the time of addition), and the already displayed first hold display and second hold display are changed to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode). , And the like), an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display changes to the notice mode, and the character or the like is directly displayed on the display in the display area of the image display device 5. Effect that is acted on or indirectly (holding action effect), or an effect that is executed when the first hold display or the second hold display does not change to the notice mode, and displays a character or the like in the display area of the image display device 5 on hold Shown directly or indirectly effect to act on (hold action Gase effect) may be included, such as. When the hold action effect is executed, the display mode of the first hold display (or second hold display) that is the target of action changes, but when the hold action effect effect is executed, the first hold display (or The display mode of (second hold display) does not change.

  Moreover, the active display effect by the display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA may be prepared as the notice effect. In the active display effect, an active display to be added to the active display area AHA is displayed in a notice mode (active display effect at the time of addition), or an already displayed active display is changed to a notice mode (from a certain notice mode to another This includes an effect to change to the notice mode (the same applies hereinafter) (active display change effect) and an effect to be executed when the active display changes to the notice mode, and activates a character or the like in the display area of the image display device 5. An effect that directly or indirectly acts on the display (active display effect), or an effect that is executed when the active display does not change to the notice mode, and displays characters and the like in the display area of the image display device 5 as active display Includes direct or indirect effects (active display effects) Good. The active display change effect is an effect that changes the special image to the notice mode. In other words, the active display, the active display frame surrounding the active display, and information corresponding to the active display (for example, characters or images displayed around the active display or the active display frame) It is a production that changes. Note that there may be a case where an active display change gaze effect that is an effect mode that is at least partially in common with the active display change effect is executed. Note that an active display change effect or an active display change effect may be executed as a main notice effect such as a step-up notice effect. When the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display that is the target of action changes, but when the active display action effect is executed, the display mode of the active display does not change.

  The display mode of the active display in the active display effect may be determined before the change (for example, at the time of starting winning) or may be determined at the time of the change. Further, the hold effect and the active display effect may be collectively referred to as a hold effect.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is reached after the variable symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  In the present embodiment, a special symbol indicating the number “3” among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7”) as the big hit symbol as the confirmed special symbols in the special symbol game. When the symbol or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, “8R probability variation big hit”, which is one mode of “big hit”, is set. Further, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, “16R probability variable big hit” which is one mode of “big hit” is obtained. The round that is controlled when the 8R probability variable big hit is a normally open round. That is, in the present embodiment, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “5” is a normal open round jackpot symbol. The round controlled when the 16R probability variation big hit is a normally open round. That is, in this embodiment, the special symbol indicating the number “7” is a normal open round jackpot symbol.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, the 8R probability variation is a big hit, but when the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed. It may be set to “2R probability variation big hit (also referred to as“ surprise accuracy ”)” in which a short-term opening round is executed. In this case, the special symbol indicating the number “5” is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the “big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, “16R probability variation big hit”, and “2R probability variation big hit” are called “big hit types”.

  In the case of 16R probable big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the reach state is reached, and a predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, the definite decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is the same decorative pattern having an odd number of symbols on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line on the side) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Are arranged in three (ie, “1”, “1”, “1”, “3”, “3”, “3”, “5”, “5”, “ 5 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”,“ 7 ”).

  In the case of 8R probability variation big hit, specifically, when the special symbol indicating the number “3” or the special symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After reaching the reach state and executing a predetermined reach effect, the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is a pattern in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In other words, “2”, “2”, “2”, “4”, “4”, “4”, “6”, “6”, “6”, “8”, “8”, and “8”).

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, if the 2R probability variation big hit is achieved, the decorative symbol variable display is started and the reach state is reached and a predetermined reach effect is achieved. After being executed, or without being in a reach state, it is only necessary to stop and display a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot. An example of the jackpot combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot is a different decorative symbol (one of at least three symbols) on a predetermined effective line formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. 3 decorative patterns (for example, “1”, “3”, “5”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “5”, “5”, “7”) ”) Or a combination of decorative symbols including a chance symbol or the like (for example, a combination of“ 1 ”,“ accuracy ”,“ 2 ”, where“ accuracy ”is an example of a chance symbol).

  In the special figure game, when the special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability changing big hit is stopped and the 8R probability changing on the surface. There may be a case where a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed.

  Based on the fact that the 16R probability variable big hit is reached, the normal open round is controlled to the normal open big hit state that is executed 16 times (rounds). ) Is performed. Further, based on the fact that the 8R probability variable big hit has been reached, the normal open round is controlled to a normal open big hit state in which the normal open round is executed eight times (rounds).

  By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” in each special figure game is improved to be higher than that in the normal state. The probability variation control is performed when a special game with a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as the probability variation number) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, or when the variable display result is “big hit”. End when is established first. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the probability variation control is being performed, the probability variation control is not performed if the special game of the predetermined number of ST times (number of probability variation) is digested. finish. The predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state. The same control as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the state in which the initialization process is executed after power-on as in the case where the system reset is performed) is performed.

  In addition, by performing the time-saving control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. Time-shortening control is performed when either of a predetermined time-saving special-purpose game is executed and the variable display result is “hit” after the end of the jackpot gaming state. To finish. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become “big hit” when the time-shortening control is being performed, the time-shortening control is ended when the predetermined time-saving special game is consumed. Note that the predetermined number of time reductions is 70, for example.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control is made to the normally open big hit state based on the fact that the 8R probability variation big hit or the 16R probability variation big hit has been reached, and the probability variation control for a predetermined number of STs (for example, 70 times) is completed after the end. Is performed, and time reduction control is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times).

  In this embodiment, the number of time reductions after the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) and the ST number (number of probability variation) are the same (both 70 times), but the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R). The number of time reductions after the probability variation big hit) may be different from the ST number (the number of probability variation). In this embodiment, the number of STs after the 8R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation) and the number of STs after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation) are the same (both 70 times). The number of STs after the big hit (the number of probability variation) may be different from the number of STs after the 16R probability variation big hit (the number of probability variation). Further, in this embodiment, the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit is the same (both 70 times) after the 16R probability variation big hit, but the number of time reductions after the 8R probability variation big hit. And the short time after the 16R probability variation big hit may be different. In the following description, a big hit gaming state, a state in which probability variation control is performed, a state in which time reduction control is performed, and the like may be referred to as advantageous states.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the short-term open big hit is executed in which two short-term open rounds are executed based on the fact that the 2R probability variable big hit is achieved. After the completion of the control, the probability variation control may be performed together with the time-shortening control as in the case of 16R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit.

  In the present embodiment, even when the variable display result does not become “big hit” when probability variation control is being performed, when a special game with a predetermined number of STs (probability variation number) is consumed. Although the probability variation control ends, the probability variation control may not be terminated until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST count (number of probability variation). In such a mode, as a mode of “big hit”, it is good to provide a normal big hit that is not subjected to probability variation control after the end. For example, when an 8R normal big hit is provided, based on the fact that the 8R normal big hit is achieved, the normal open round is controlled to a normal open big hit state in which eight rounds are executed. (Time reduction control may or may not be performed).

  In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good. In such an embodiment, after the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the probability of change) is not digested until the special game with the predetermined number of STs (the number of changes with certainty) is exhausted, A probabilistic falling lottery may be performed in each game. The same applies to the time reduction control.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses the normal symbol display unit 20 to make the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) shorter than that in the normal state, or to change the normal symbol in each time the normal symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. In this way, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in accordance with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result Is reduced to become a “big hit”. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  A gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time reduction control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of the time reduction control and the probability change control is performed in a game state other than the normal state, the special game (second special game) can be frequently executed, and each special game (first special game) The probability that the variable display result in the figure game or the second special figure game will be a “big hit” is increased, which is advantageous to the player. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed for a decorative pattern. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol that is a big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variation big hit, the variation is changed again with the same decorative symbols aligned. , Any one of the decorative symbols corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 16R probability variation big hit and the decorative symbols corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big hit may be finally stopped and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols.

  In addition, after the definite decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 8R probability variable big win is derived and displayed, the period until the end of the eighth round (or after the end of the eighth round, the next variable display game is executed). In the period until it is started, a round-number promotion effect for notifying that the jackpot is a 16R probability variable jackpot may be executed. In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit is not provided. However, when the 2R probability variation big hit is provided, the same applies to the case where a definite decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation big hit is derived and displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a normal jackpot is not provided, but after a fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination corresponding to the normal jackpot is derived and displayed when the normal jackpot is provided, a period until the final round ends ( Or, after the end of the final round, during the period until the next variable display game is started), a probability variation promotion effect that informs that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot may be executed.

  In addition, the promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) executed during the round is referred to as jackpot medium promotion effect (bonus medium number of rounds promotion effect, jackpot medium chance change promotion effect), and after the final round ends The promotion effect (round number promotion effect, probability change promotion effect) to be executed may be referred to as an ending promotion effect (ending round number promotion effect, ending probability change promotion effect).

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and an audio control board 13 as shown in FIG. 3 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Further, a drive control board 16B and light emitter control boards 16C to 16F are mounted as control boards connected to the effect control board 12 via the effect control relay board 16A. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5 and the light emitter unit 71. ~ 74, speaker 8, top frame LED 9a, left frame LED 9b, right frame LED 9c, movable members 51 to 54 connected to operation motors 60A to 60C, decorative member 57, and other effect devices, etc. Various circuits for controlling the production operation are installed. That is, the effect control board 12 is configured to display all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the sound output operation from the speaker 8, lighting the light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 71 to 74, and the light emitters. The lighting of the light emitting members constituting the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, and the decoration LED, which are different from the units 71 to 74, the movable combination 173, the movable combination 175, the movable members 51 to 54, and the decoration member 57 It has a function of determining control contents for causing the electric parts for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as the driving operations of the actuators 172A to 172D to be moved and the operation motors 60A to 60C. The effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 includes an effect control microcomputer 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, and effect data memories 123A to 123C.

  The effect control board 12 has a function of determining the control contents of the drive control board 16B and the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F. The drive control board 16 </ b> B performs drive control of the movable combination 173, the movable combination 175, and the movable members 51 to 54 according to the control content determined by the effect control board 12. Specifically, the drive control board 16B has the origin detection signals from the origin sensors 171A to 171D that detect the origin positions of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175, and the movable member positions that detect the positions of the movable members 51 to 54. A position detection signal from the sensor 61 is received. Further, the drive control board 16B has a drive signal for driving the movable combination 173 and the actuators 172A to 172D for driving the movable combination 175, and a drive signal for driving the operation motors 60A to 60C for driving the movable members 51 to 54. Is output. The light emitter control boards 16C to 16F perform light emission control of the light emitter units 71 to 74, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c according to the control content determined by the effect control board 12.

  As will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, the movable accessory 173 has three movable mechanisms: a rotation mechanism 173A, an opening / closing mechanism 173B, and a slide mechanism 173C. The actuator 172A rotates the rotation mechanism 173A to move the movable accessory 173 from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5. The origin sensor 171A detects the rotation mechanism 173A and detects that the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position in the rotation direction. The actuator 172B opens and closes the opening / closing mechanism 173B to move the split pieces 173B1 to 173B3 of the movable accessory 173 from the closed state to the open state. The origin sensor 171B detects the opening / closing mechanism 173B, and detects that the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position in the opening / closing direction. Further, the actuator 172C moves the slide mechanism 173C laterally to move the movable accessory 173 from the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 to the left and right. The origin sensor 171C detects the slide mechanism 173C, and detects that the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position in the lateral movement direction. That is, the movable accessory 173 performs a plurality of operations by the plurality of actuators 172A to 172C.

  By the way, the movable accessory 173 has three movable mechanisms: a rotation mechanism 173A, an opening / closing mechanism 173B, and a slide mechanism 173C, and the effect control microcomputer 120 uses each movable mechanism as an individual movable accessory. It can be controlled independently. In the present embodiment, the “movable combination” refers to a combination of a plurality of movable mechanisms such as the movable combination 173 and also refers to each movable mechanism. For example, the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B will be described as separate movable accessories.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, the movable accessory 175 is moved in the vertical direction from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 by the actuator 172D. The origin sensor 171D detects that the movable accessory 175 is at the origin position.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speaker 8 based on a command, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the pachinko gaming machine 1 also has other switches (for example, a glass door (non- A switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibration, and a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves). In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 4A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4A, the command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command that specifies the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, the determination result of whether the variable display result is “losing”, “16R-probable big hit” or “8R-probable big hit” or the type of jackpot Different EXT data is set according to the determination result.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating a confirmed ornament symbol (final stop symbol) in each ornament symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command 9200H is a power failure recovery designation command that designates execution of a power failure recovery process. The power failure recovery designation command is a command for causing the pachinko gaming machine 1 to execute a power failure recovery process after the supply of power is resumed from the power failure state. The production control microcomputer 120 that has received the power failure recovery designation command executes a power failure recovery process. The effect control microcomputer 120 performs, for example, an initial operation of the effect device as the power failure recovery process. As an initial operation of the effect device, for example, a power failure recovery screen may be displayed on the image display device 5 informing the player that the power has recovered from the power failure. In addition, as the initial operation of the rendering device, an origin return operation for returning the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 to the origin position and an initial operation for confirming the operation of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 may be performed. . Further, as the initial operation of the effect device, an origin return operation for returning the movable members 51 to 54 to the origin position and an initial operation for confirming the operations of the movable members 51 to 54 may be performed. Moreover, you may make it perform the test lighting of the lamp | ramp 9, the output of the monitor sound from the speaker 8, etc. as an initial operation of a production | presentation apparatus.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the big winning opening is opened to notify that the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. Command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first start prize is generated when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start prize port formed by the normal prize ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the first special figure game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied.

  The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and the second start winning is generated. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the second start winning memory display area 5HR or the like.

  For example, the command transmitted as the on-hold storage information may be a first start opening prize specifying command or a second starting opening prize specifying that specifies whether a start winning is made at the first starting winning opening or a starting winning is made at the second starting winning opening. A command is transmitted, and a first reserved memory number notification command and a second reserved memory number notification command for specifying the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory count decreases, the reserved memory count addition designation command (the second reserved figure count designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory count or the second special figure reserved memory count has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying the total pending storage number may be transmitted. Further, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and the determination result of the big hit type as the winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates a determination result of a variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as a winning determination result. The variation category is a name when the variation patterns of decorative symbols are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including a variation pattern of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  The command E0XXH is an initialization designation command that designates initialization. Receiving the initialization designation command, the effect control microcomputer 120 executes initialization processing according to the EXT data XX (hexadecimal number) of the initialization designation command. For example, in the EXT data, the initial operation of the image display device 5, the movable accessory 173, or the rendering device of the movable accessory 175 can be designated. In the present embodiment, the initialization designation command is transmitted to the sub-board in the initialization process of step S71 executed once when the power is turned on in the main process of the CPU 103 described later with reference to FIG. However, the initialization designation command may be transmitted at another timing.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning random number determination process (FIG. 34A), the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result when the start winning is generated. If it is determined as “big hit”, the type of jackpot is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation category (based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation category) is determined. Fluctuation pattern type) is determined. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 can recognize whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the big hit type. The variation category can be recognized based on the value set in the variation category command.

  It should be noted that the presentation control commands such as the change pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are sent to the presentation control microcomputer 120 by one or more presentation devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, movable accessory 173, movable Used to control the accessory 175 and the movable members 51 to 54. Hereinafter, an effect control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, an effect control command used for controlling audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, and a light emission operation of the lamp 9 ( The effect control command used for controlling the lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation is also referred to as a lamp control command. Note that, among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing the operation and an input / output port (I / O) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, Numeric data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the display result and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses the random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the decorative pattern variation pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” is referred to as “losing variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern” (“non-reach loss variation pattern”, “non-reach” corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss”. (Also referred to as “(loss) variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern ”(“ reach loss variation pattern ”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ reach ”among the cases where the variable display result is“ losing ”. Also referred to as).

  A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as “hit variation pattern”. The hit fluctuation pattern includes a “big hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and a “small hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”. Also good. As the big hit fluctuation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  Non-reach variation patterns are prepared with multiple variation patterns with different variation times corresponding to time-short control executed when the total number of pending storage is large, or when the gaming state is in a probabilistic state or a short-time state. Good. As a result, by selecting one of the variation patterns according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state, it is possible to control to shorten the variation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state.

  For variation patterns including a reach effect such as a big hit variation pattern and a reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to the reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. Note that the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 6 shows a specific example of the variation category and the variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 6, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) variation category. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the variation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. The variation categories “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” belong to the variation category “PA3”. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” belong to the variation category “PB3”. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The variation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the variation category “PA2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which a slip effect is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

  The variation pattern “PA3-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3” is a normal reach variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4” is a super reach α (lost) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. Note that the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA4-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo-continuous variation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (production) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The variation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the variation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is not provided, but when the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) is provided, the fluctuation categories “PC1”, “PC2”, “PC3” for the 2R probability variation big hit (rush accuracy) are provided. May be provided. Variation patterns “PC1-1” to “PC1-3” belong to the variation category “PC1”. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-1” is a non-reach (surprising) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC1-2” is a non-reach (accuracy) fluctuation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. The variation pattern “PC1-3” is a non-reach (probability) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once.

  The variation patterns “PC2-1” to “PC2-4” belong to the variation category “PC2”. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-1” is a super reach α (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC2-2” is a super reach α (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PC2-3” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC2-4” is a super reach α (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice.

  Variation patterns “PC3-1” to “PC3-4” belong to the variation category “PC3”. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-1” is a super reach β (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PC3-2” is a super reach β (surprise) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gas. The variation pattern “PC3-3” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PC3-4” is a super reach β (surprise) variation pattern in which pseudo continuous variation (production) is executed twice.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 101 stores data (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control command) constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, The data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 7, for example, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result in the first special symbol game (the special symbol game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is derived and displayed. In order to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result as “big hit (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit)” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table that is referred to. Further, the display result determination table 130A is displayed before the fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the second special symbol game (the special symbol game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display result is referred to as “big hit (16R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit)” to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table.

  In the display result determination table 130A, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result according to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) ”And“ Lose ”are assigned to special map display results. Specifically, in the display result determination table 130A, a numerical value (determination) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the low probability low base state or the high probability high base state is set. Value) is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the display result determination table 130A, when the gaming state is the high probability state, more determined values are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” than when the gaming state is the low probability state. Specifically, in the low-accuracy state, a predetermined number (specifically, 190) of determined values (a value in the range of “8000” to “8189”) are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. On the other hand, in the high-accuracy state, more than the predetermined number (specifically, 819) of decision values “8000” to “8818” are assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit”. With such a setting, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is “big hit” compared to the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). As a result, the probability of being determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state becomes high.

  Note that different display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure. In the first special figure display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result of “small hit” has a predetermined range. In the second special figure display result determination table for the second special figure, a special figure display result in which the predetermined value in the predetermined range is smaller than the first special figure display result determination table is “small hit”. May be assigned. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid frequent occurrence of “small hits” in a gaming state in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  FIG. 8 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state. This is a table to be referred to. In the big hit type determination table 131, the first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, or the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Depending on whether or not (special game using the second special figure) is executed, the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is the big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation) Jackpot).

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 131, when the game is the first special figure game, that is, when the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a fluctuation special figure) is the first special figure, a predetermined number (specifically, 50) determined values (values in the range of “0” to “49”) are assigned to 16R probability variation big hits. On the other hand, in the case of the second special figure game, that is, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the determined values (“0” to “0”) more than the predetermined number (specifically, 80). 79 ”) is assigned to the 16R probability variation jackpot. With such a setting, in the second special figure game, the 16R probability variation big hit is more likely than the first special figure, so that the game state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B ( In the high-accuracy and high-base state (specifically, up to the 70th rotation after the end of the big hit), it is possible to enhance the expectation that the 16R-probable big hit will be achieved.

  In this embodiment, the 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is not provided. However, in the case of providing the 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability), in the case of the second special figure game, compared to the case of the first special figure game. A small number of determined values may be assigned to the 2R probability variation big hit (surprise). With such a setting, in the second special figure game, 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability) is less likely than in the first special figure, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. In the gaming state, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of 2R probability variation big hit (crash probability), which makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest by extending the game.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to in order to determine the variation category as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table and different determination ratios. In the variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for determining the variation category is assigned to each variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables having different determined values (for example, the range and number of determined values) assigned to at least one variation category among a plurality of types of variation categories. Yes. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information on all the variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different types of variation patterns that can be determined in the variation pattern determination table, different determination ratios, and the like. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the variation pattern determination random value MR5 is assigned to each variation pattern. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation pattern determination tables having different determination values (for example, a range or number of determination values) assigned to at least one variation pattern among a plurality of types of variation patterns. Yes. Instead of a plurality of variation pattern determination tables, one large variation pattern determination table including information of each variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data (for example, a special figure) Process flags). Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 9 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 9 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game. A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game (not yet started) even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting winning is generated. The holding data (first special figure holding information) of the first special figure game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a reservation number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (first special figure hold information) until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B is a special game that has not yet started even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second starting winning has occurred. Hold data (second special figure hold information) of (second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates a holding number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning opening, and makes a random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as the hold data (second special figure hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The first special symbol game hold data (first special figure hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The hold data (second special figure hold information based on the establishment of the second start winning prize) may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

  The general-purpose hold storage unit 151C stores on-hold data related to a general-purpose game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Information). For example, the common figure hold storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball in association with the hold number in the order in which the game ball has passed the passage gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as hold data (ordinary hold information) until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value, data indicating an on state or an off state, and the like for each of a probability variation flag and a time reduction flag.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting a count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, etc. Remembered. The game control counter setting unit 154 also stores a variation count value that is a stored value of a variation counter for counting one or both of the ST count (probable variation count) and the short time count.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the effect control board 12 includes an effect control microcomputer 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, an ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and an effect control microcomputer 120. A RAM 122 that provides a work area and effect data memories 123A to 123C are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control microcomputer 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, the production control microcomputer 120 reads fixed data from the ROM 121, the production control microcomputer 120 writes various fluctuation data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the fluctuation data write operation for production control. Fluctuation data reading operation in which the microcomputer 120 reads out various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 122, a reception operation in which the effect control microcomputer 120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12, and an effect control microcomputer A transmission operation in which 120 outputs various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 is also performed.

  The effect control microcomputer 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image for the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command for the audio control board 13 are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Wiring etc. are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected. In addition, wirings for transmitting various signals to the drive control board 16B, the light emitter control board 16C, and the light emitter control board 16D are also connected via the effect control relay board 16A. Information signals transmitted to the drive control board 16B include drive control signals indicating commands and control data for moving the movable members 51 to 54 and the decorative member 57 by driving the operation motors 60A to 60C, and actuators 172A to 172D. It is only necessary to include a drive control signal indicating a command or control data for moving the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 by driving. The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16C only needs to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting the plurality of light emitters with respect to the light emitter units 71 to 74.

  The light emitter control board 16D is mounted on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16D is provided as a left frame LED 9b on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. It is only necessary to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters. The light emitter control board 16E is mounted above the gaming machine frame 3, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16E is provided as a top frame LED 9a above the game machine frame 3. What is necessary is just to include the lighting signal which shows the light emission data for lighting a several light-emitting body. The light emitter control board 16F is mounted on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and an information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16F is provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 as a right frame LED 9c. It is only necessary to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitters.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16D is only the effect control relay board 16A from the effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. To be transmitted. The information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16E is transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 via the light emitter control board 16D in addition to the effect control relay board 16A. The Further, the information signal transmitted to the light emitter control board 16F is transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 to the effect control relay board 16A, in addition to the light emitter control board 16D and the light emitter control board 16E. To be transmitted.

  Further, from the drive control board 16B, a position detection signal as an information signal indicating a result of detecting the positions of the movable members 51 to 54 by the movable member position sensor 61 is provided via the effect control relay board 16A. Is transmitted to.

  In addition, a position detection signal as an information signal indicating the result of detecting the positions of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 by the origin sensors 171A to 171D from the drive control board 16B via the effect control relay board 16A. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  The effect control relay board 16A is installed in a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 2, and transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the drive control board 16B, the light emitter control board 16C, and the light emitter control board 16D. Relay various signals. The back pack is attached to the center portion on the back side of the game board 2, and an opening facing the image display device 5 may be formed at the center. The back pack may be provided so as to cover the main board 11, the audio output board 13, the drive control board 16B, the light emitter control board 16C, and the like from the rear. An effect control board box in which the effect control board 12 is accommodated may be attached to the rear side of the back pack.

  The drive control board 16 </ b> B is a control board for effect moving mechanism control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and the movable members 51 to 54 are rotated based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A driver IC for performing control, movement control of the decoration member 57 and drive control of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 are mounted. Output signals from the drive control board 16B are transmitted toward the operation motors 60A to 60C and the actuators 172A to 172D. Further, the drive control board 16B has wiring for transmitting the position detection signals output from the movable member position sensor 61 and the origin sensors 171A to 171D to the effect control board 12 via the effect control relay board 16A. As long as it is included. The light emitter control board 16C is a light emitter output control board provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is arranged in the light emitter units 71 to 74 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. Various circuits for driving the light emitter for performing lighting control on the plurality of light emitters are mounted.

  The light emitter control boards 16D to 16F are mounted on the gaming machine frame 3 and are light emitter output control boards provided separately from the effect control board 12, such as commands and control data from the effect control board 12 and the like. Based on the above, various circuits for driving a light emitter for performing lighting control on a plurality of light emitters provided as the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c are mounted.

  The drive control board 16 </ b> B controls the operations of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 in accordance with an instruction from the effect control microcomputer 120. As described above, the origin sensors 171A to 171D that detect the origin positions of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175 are connected to the drive control board 16B. The drive control board 16B is connected to the movable combination 173 and the actuators 172A to 172D that drive the movable combination 175. As the origin sensor, a contact type sensor such as a micro switch, or a non-contact type sensor such as a photo sensor or a capacitance sensor can be used.

  The origin sensors 171A to 171D are sensors that detect that the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 is at the origin position and output a detection signal. The origin sensors 171A to 171D change the detection signal from the off state to the on state or from the on state to the off state when the movable combination is detected. In the present embodiment, the case where the origin sensors 171A to 171D detect digital (ON / OFF) signals will be described. However, the origin sensors 171A to 171D may output analog values, for example. For example, a resolver or a rotary encoder attached to a laser sensor or a motor may be used to output an analog value.

  The drive control board 16B can control output to the actuators 172A to 172D based on detection signals input from the origin sensors 171A to 171D. The drive control board 16B controls the origin sensors 171A to 171D to move the movable combination 173 or the movable combination 175 from the position where the movable combination 173 or the movable combination 175 is detected to the operation end of each actuator. Can do. For example, the drive control board 16B operates the actuator 172A when the detection signal of the origin sensor 171A is in the on state, and moves the movable accessory 173 to the operation end locked by a mechanical stopper (not shown). it can. Further, when the detection signal of the origin sensor 171A is in the OFF state, the drive control board 16B can move the actuator 172A to the origin position where the detection signal of the origin sensor 171A is in the ON state.

  The actuators 172A to 172D are, for example, a motor, an electromagnetic solenoid or the like. When the actuators 172A to 172D are motors, the drive control board 16B may have a function of a motor driver. When the actuators 172A to 172D are electromagnetic solenoids, the drive control board 16B may have a function of supplying a voltage for operating the electromagnetic solenoids.

  In this embodiment, the case where the origin sensors 171A to 171D are arranged in order to detect the position of the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 is illustrated. However, for example, the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 You may make it arrange | position the sensor which detects that it exists in an operation | movement end. Moreover, although the case where there are four actuators 172A to 172D is illustrated, the number of actuators is not limited to this. Details of the operation of the movable combination 173 or the movable combination 175 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  On the effect control board 12, numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation are counted by a random number circuit or the like so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the production control microcomputer 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  Specifically, the ROM 121 stores various tables for executing the hold effect. For example, the ROM 121 has any one of a plurality of types of display modes of the first hold display displayed in the first start-winning storage display area 5HL as a table for executing the hold effect at the time of addition of the first hold display. The 1st hold | maintenance display mode determination table referred in order to determine may be memorize | stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of first hold display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the first hold display mode determination table and the respective determination ratios. . Each first hold display mode determination table includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display at the time of addition for each display mode of the first hold display. ) May be assigned. Instead of the plurality of first hold display mode determination tables, one large first hold display mode determination table including information of all the first hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, in the ROM 121, any one of a plurality of types of display modes of the second hold display displayed in the second start-winning storage display area 5HR as a table for executing the hold effect at the time of addition of the first hold display is displayed. A second hold display mode determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not may be stored.

  Also, in the ROM 121, as a table relating to the execution of the hold change effect of the first hold display, is the display mode of the first hold display already displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL changed to another display mode? In order to determine which display mode to change to the first pending change presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change to another display mode. A first hold change mode determination table to be referred to may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of first hold change presence / absence determination tables having different determination ratios that change to another display mode and no change to another display mode, and the first hold change mode determination. A plurality of first pending change mode determination tables may be stored in which the types of display modes that can be determined in the table and the respective determination ratios are different from each other. Each first pending change presence / absence determination table may be assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining whether there is a change or not. In each of the first hold change mode determination tables, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first hold display after the change is displayed for each display mode of the first hold display. ) May be assigned. Instead of a plurality of first hold change presence / absence determination tables, one large first hold change presence / absence determination table including information of all the first hold change presence / absence determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Further, instead of the plurality of first hold change mode determination tables, one large first hold change mode determination table including information of all the first hold change mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121. Similarly, the ROM 121 changes the display mode of the second hold display already displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR to another display mode as a table related to the execution of the hold change effect of the second hold display. To determine whether to change to a second pending change presence / absence determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to change to another display mode, or to change to another display mode The 2nd pending | holding change aspect determination table referred to may be memorize | stored.

  The ROM 121 stores a first hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the first hold display (timing of how many changes will be executed later). May be. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of first hold change effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the first hold change effect execution timing determination table. It may be. In each first hold change effect execution timing determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first hold change effect is assigned to each execution timing. Just do it. Further, instead of the plurality of first hold change effect execution timing determination tables, one large first hold change effect execution timing determination table including information of all the first hold change effect execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. Also good. Similarly, the ROM 121 has a second hold change effect execution timing determination table that is referred to in order to determine the execution timing of the hold change effect of the second hold display (timing of how many changes will be executed later). It may be stored.

  Note that a table including information on two or more of the first hold display mode determination table, the first hold change presence / absence determination table, the first hold change mode determination table, and the first hold change effect execution timing determination table is a ROM 121. May be stored.

  Further, in the ROM 121, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or the second hold display) is changed to another display mode, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or the second hold display). As a table related to the holding action effect to be applied indirectly or indirectly, an action effect execution presence / absence determination table referred to for determining whether or not to execute the holding action effect may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action effect execution presence / absence determination tables with execution rates different from each other. In each action effect execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination may be assigned to each of execution and non-execution. Further, when there are a plurality of effect modes of the holding action effect, when it is determined that the holding action effect is to be executed, the holding action effect effect that is referred to in order to determine which effect mode is selected from among the plurality of effect modes. The mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, a plurality of hold action effect effect mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of hold action effect effect modes that can be determined in the hold effect effect effect mode determination table and the respective determination ratios may be stored. . In each hold action effect effect mode determination table, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the effect mode of the hold effect effect may be assigned to each effect mode.

  Further, in the ROM 121, when it is determined that the display mode of the first hold display (or second hold display) is not changed to another display mode, the character or the like is directly displayed on the first hold display (or second hold display). Alternatively, a table for determining whether or not to execute the holding action gaze effect may be stored as a table relating to the holding action gaze effect that is applied indirectly or indirectly. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of action / gase effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. Each action gaze effect execution presence / absence determination table may be assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination, with and without execution. In addition, when there are a plurality of presentation modes of the holding action gaze effect, the holding action that is referred to in order to determine which of the plurality of presentation modes is determined when it is determined to execute the holding action gasse effect. A gasse effect effect mode determination table may be stored in the ROM 121. Specifically, there are stored a plurality of hold action gaze effect effect mode determination tables that are different from each other in the type of effect mode of the hold action gaze effect that can be determined in the hold action gaze effect effect mode determination table. May be. Even if each holding mode has a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the holding mode effect production mode, each of the production modes is assigned to the respective holding mode gaze production production mode determination table. Good.

  When executing an active display change effect that changes a special image including an active display, the ROM 121 is referred to as a table related to the active display change effect to determine whether to execute the active display change effect. The active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table may be stored. Specifically, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of active display change effect execution presence / absence determination tables with different determination ratios of execution and non-execution. Each active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table may be assigned a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination, with and without execution. Further, when there are a plurality of active display change effects, when the active display change effect is determined to be executed, the active display referred to determine which of the plurality of effects is selected. You may memorize | store the change production production | presentation aspect determination table in ROM121. Specifically, a plurality of active display change effect effect mode determination tables are stored in which the types of active display change effect effect modes that can be determined in the active display change effect effect mode determination table are different from each other. May be. Each active display change effect presentation mode determination table has a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining the display mode of the active display change effect assigned to each of the effect modes. Good.

  In ROM 121, the effect control microcomputer 120 controls effect operations by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 173, and the movable accessory 175). Data constituting a plurality of effect control patterns used is stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as decorative symbols, notice effects (including pre-read notice effects), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern is a decoration corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special game until the finalized special symbol that is the special graphic display result is derived and displayed. Design operations such as variable display operation, reach production, re-lottery production, etc., or various production operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols (for example, hold for the display mode of the hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL) Such as effects, hold effects for the display mode of the hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, etc.).

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 12. On the effect control board 12, for example, an effect control microcomputer 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, effect data memories 123A to 123C, and the like are mounted. The ROM 121, the RAM 122, and the effect data memories 123 </ b> A to 123 </ b> C may be partly or wholly incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 120, or part or all of the ROM 121, RAM 122, and effect data memories 123 </ b> A to 123 </ b> C It may be attached. The presentation control microcomputer 120 shown in FIG. 10 is configured using, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a CPU 130, a work memory 131, a host interface 132, a DRAM interface 133, and a data memory interface 134. Yes. In addition, the production control microcomputer 120 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 140, a VRAM (Video RAM) 141, a display output system interface 142, an audio processing circuit 143, an audio interface 144, and a general-purpose output controller 145. It has. Note that the VDP 140 may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The VDP 140, the VRAM 141, the display output system interface 142, the audio processing circuit 143, the audio interface 144, and the general-purpose output controller 145 may be partly or wholly incorporated in the production control microcomputer 120, or a part thereof. Alternatively, all may be configured as an external circuit of the production control microcomputer 120.

  The CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 executes control processing according to the effect control program. The ROM 121 stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like that are read for the CPU 130 to execute control processing. The RAM 122 temporarily stores various effect data read from the effect data memories 123A to 123C. The effect data temporarily stored in the RAM 122 is provided for executing various processes by the CPU 130 and the VDP 140. In addition to the program for effect control, the ROM 121 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination table, and various effect control patterns. Pattern data and the like are stored. The effect control pattern is, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, light emitter control data, movable member control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, etc. It is composed of process data including The RAM 122 stores various data used for controlling the rendering operation.

  The effect data memories 123A to 123C store fixed data for executing effects. Of the effect data memories 123 </ b> A to 123 </ b> C, the effect data memories 123 </ b> A and 123 </ b> B only need to be provided with a storage area for storing in advance various image data (image element data) indicating the display image on the image display device 5. The effect data memory 123C includes a storage area for storing various motor data indicating the drive control contents of the operation motors 60A to 60C and the actuators 172A to 172D, a top frame LED 9a, a left frame LED 9b, a right frame LED 9c, and a light emitter. A storage area or the like for storing in advance various light emission data indicating the lighting control contents of the units 71 to 74 may be provided. The light emission data indicating the lighting control contents of the light emitter units 71 to 74 may be generated using image data. The effect data memories 123A to 123C may be non-rewritable semiconductor memories, for example, may be rewritable semiconductor memories such as flash memories such as NAND-ROMs, or are non-volatile such as magnetic memories and optical memories. Any recording medium may be used.

  Data for creating lighting data (light emission data) of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, and the light emitter units 71 to 74 is the image data of the effect image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Separately, it is stored in advance in one of the effect data memories 123A and 123B.

  FIG. 11 shows a setting example of addresses and stored contents in the ROM 121 and the effect data memories 123A to 123C. FIG. 11A shows an example of setting the storage contents in the ROM 121. The ROM 121 is assigned consecutive addresses from an address MA00 as a head address to an address MA10 as a final address. FIG. 11 (B1) shows a setting example of storage contents in the effect data memory 123A. In the effect data memory 123A, an address MA10 + 1 that is the next address continuous to the final address of the ROM 121 is given as the head address, and a continuous address up to the address MA20 that is the final address is given. FIG. 11 (B2) shows a setting example of the stored contents in the effect data memory 123B. In the effect data memory 123B, an address MA20 + 1 that is the next address continuous to the final address of the effect data memory 123A is given as a head address, and consecutive addresses up to the address MA30 that is the final address are assigned. FIG. 11 (B3) shows a setting example of storage contents in the effect data memory 123C. In the effect data memory 123C, an address MA30 + 1 that is the next address continuous to the final address of the effect data memory 123B is given as the head address, and continuous addresses up to the address MA40 that is the final address are assigned. In this way, continuous addresses are assigned to the ROM 121 and the effect data memories 123A to 123C, and the next address of the final address in the ROM 121 is the head address of the effect data memory 123A.

  In ROM 121 and effect data memories 123A to 123C, programs and data used for execution of effects by various effect devices are stored in advance as effect data (including binary codes constituting a program module). The ROM 121 and the effect data memories 123A to 123C are provided with a plurality of storage areas (storage areas) corresponding to the stored contents. For example, the ROM 121 stores a first storage area in which a program for production control and various management data are stored, a second storage area in which audio data is stored, and reserves other than the first storage area and the second storage area. There is an area. For example, when the ROM 121 as a whole has a storage capacity of 8 gigabits, the first storage area may have a storage capacity of 1 gigabit and the second storage area may have a storage capacity of 6 gigabits. The first storage area may have a storage capacity of 1.5 gigabits or 2 gigabits. The effect data memory 123A is provided with a storage area for storing audio data and a storage area for storing image data. Table data of various tables prepared for the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting the effect control pattern, and the like are stored in the ROM 121 as management data. That's fine. The ROM 121 and the effect data memory 123A store audio data used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the effect data memories 123A and 123B, image data used for controlling display of the effect image on the image display device 5 is stored. Image data used for lighting control of a plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 71 to 74 may be stored.

  The ROM 121 is provided with a storage area for storing sound data, and at least the sound data is stored. Accordingly, the ROM 121 provides a first area for storing sound data as first control data used for sound control for outputting sound from at least the speakers 8L and 8R. The effect data memory 123A is provided with a storage area for storing image data. Therefore, the effect data memory 123 </ b> A is a display control for displaying an image on the image display device 5 or a light emitter such as the top frame LED 9 a, the left frame LED 9 b, and the right frame LED 9 c, and a plurality of light emission units arranged in the light emitter units 71 to 74. A second area for storing image data as second control data used for lighting control for lighting the body is provided.

  In this embodiment, a storage area for storing audio data is provided not only in the ROM 121 but also in the effect data memory 123A. The storage area for storing audio data in the ROM 121 is allocated from the address MA02 shown in FIG. 11A to the address MA10 that is the final address in the ROM 121. As shown in FIG. 11 (B1), the storage area in which the audio data is stored in the effect data memory 123A is allocated from the address MA10 + 1 to the address MA11 which is the head address of the effect data memory 123A. As described above, the effect data memory 123A providing the second area stores the audio data in the continuous specific address range from the next address MA10 + 1 to the address MA11 of the final address MA10 of the ROM 121 providing the first area. An area is allocated. In the effect data memory 123A providing the second area, audio data as first control data is stored in a storage area corresponding to a specific address range continuous from the last address of the ROM 121 providing the first area. That is, the audio data as the first control data is stored not only in the storage area provided in the ROM 121 that provides the first area, but also in the storage area provided in the effect data memory 123A that provides the second area. It is also stored in a storage area to which consecutive addresses from address MA10 + 1 to address MA11, which are the next addresses of address MA10, are assigned.

  The effect data memory 123A originally provides a storage area for storing image data used for display control of the image display device 5 and the like. On the other hand, because it is necessary to prepare audio data corresponding to various musical pieces, the data amount of control information to be stored in the ROM 121 or the like to control the effects by various effect devices increases, and the storage capacity becomes insufficient. There is a case. In this case, if a separate new storage device is prepared, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. Therefore, the production cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced by providing a data storage area used for control different from the image data in the effect data memory 123A. When providing an audio data storage area, a storage area corresponding to a specific address range continuous from the final address assigned to the audio data storage area in the ROM 121 is allocated to the effect data memory 123A. As a result, even if the audio data is stored across both the storage area of the ROM 121 and the storage area of the effect data memory 123A, it is read while updating (incrementing) the address in the same manner as other audio data. Thus, the audio data can be read out appropriately.

  The CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 shown in FIG. 10 executes a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric parts in accordance with the effect control program read from the ROM 121. At this time, the CPU 130 reads fixed data from the ROM 121 via the host interface 132, or the CPU 130 writes the variable data to the RAM 122 via the DRAM interface 133 to temporarily store the data. The CPU 130 reads out the various data temporarily stored in the RAM 122 via the DRAM interface 133, and the CPU 130 receives various signals from the outside of the effect control microcomputer 120 such as the main board 11 via the host interface 132. A reception operation for receiving an input, a transmission operation in which the CPU 130 outputs various signals to the outside of the effect control microcomputer 120 via the host interface 132 and other various circuits, and the like. Divide. Further, the CPU 130 can access the effect data memories 123A to 123C via the data memory interface 134, and read stored data.

  The VDP 140 of the effect control microcomputer 120 has an image data processing function such as a high-speed drawing function and a moving image decoding function for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example, according to a display control command from the CPU 130. An image processor that executes image data processing. The VDP 140 can access the effect data memories 123A to 123C via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 120 or the data memory interface 134, and read image data.

  The VRAM 141 provides a work area for temporarily storing the image data read from the effect data memories 123A and 123B, or a virtual display in which display data of the effect image created by the drawing process by the VDP 140 is expanded and stored. Or provide an area. If the storage area of the VRAM 141 is allocated with each area such as a palette area in which palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which character image data read from the image data memory 121 is stored, and a CG buffer, for example. Good. The CG buffer temporarily stores palette data in which the display color of the character is defined when the rendering process by the VDP 140 is executed, or temporarily stores the display data of the effect image created by the rendering process. It is used to Display data expanded and stored in the VRAM 141 may be pixel data (raster data) created by the VDP 140 based on vector data (vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons. The VRAM 141 stores, for example, an actual display area that stores display data of various images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 and display data of various images that are not displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A virtual display area may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the image display device 5 is created in the virtual display area of the VRAM 141, and the display data of the virtual display area read by the VDP 140 is used as a display output system. You may output from the interface 142 to the image display apparatus 5 side.

  An image display area and an image drawing area may be allocated to the storage area of the VRAM 141. In the image display area, display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 is stored. In the image drawing area, display data of each effect image created by the drawing process is stored. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched each time a V blank is generated. The V blank is generated at a cycle in which an image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is updated. Each time a V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal is output from the VDP 140 to the CPU 130 and various other interrupt signals are output from the VDP 140 to the CPU 130.

  By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V blank occurs, display data for each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V blank period (first drawing display period). In the next V blank period (second drawing display period), the storage area is switched to the image display area. Accordingly, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output from the display output system interface 142 to the image display device 5 in the second drawing display period, and in the second drawing display period. In the storage area to which the image drawing area is assigned, display data created by the drawing process is stored.

  The CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 accesses system registers and attribute registers built in the VDP 140. Various commands and data are stored in the system register and the attribute register in accordance with process data such as display control data included in the effect control pattern. In this way, in the effect control microcomputer 120, the display operation in the image display device 5 is indirectly controlled by the CPU 130.

  The process data indicates the setting contents that the CPU 130 of the effect control microcomputer 120 performs on the system register and attribute register of the VDP 140 every time V blank occurs. The setting contents of the system register include drawing and data transfer commands, CG data to be transferred, palette data, and attribute settings. The setting contents of the attribute register only need to indicate an attribute as a parameter used for rendering processing of the effect image. In the process data, attributes are set so that the image is updated every time a V blank occurs. As a result, the image can be updated each time a V blank is generated.

  The display output system interface 142 sends a color signal (gradation control signal) corresponding to the display data output from the VDP 140 and a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal) or scanning signal (drive control signal) to the image display device 5. By outputting the image, various images can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

  The audio processing circuit 143 is a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing. The audio processing circuit 143 accesses the ROM 121 via the internal bus of the production control microcomputer 120 and the host interface 132, or produces the production data memories 123 </ b> A to 123 </ b> A through the internal bus and the data memory interface 134 of the production control microcomputer 120. The voice data can be read out by accessing 123C. Note that the audio processing circuit 143 may directly access the ROM 121 and the effect data memories 123A to 123C. For example, the sound processing circuit 143 is read from the ROM 121 and the effect data memories 123A to 123C by the access by the CPU 130. It may be accessed indirectly by receiving supply of audio data. The audio processing circuit 143 generates an audio signal (sound effect signal) using the audio data. The audio signal (sound effect signal) generated by the audio processing circuit 143 is output toward the audio output board 13 via the audio interface 144.

  The general-purpose output controller 145 controls, for example, lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the top frame LED 9a, left frame LED 9b, right frame LED 9c, and light emitter units 71 to 74, and drive control of operation motors 60A to 60C and actuators 172A to 172D. Is a control circuit for performing operation control in various rendering devices. The general-purpose output controller 145 can read motor data and light emission data by accessing the effect data memories 123A to 123C via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 120 or the data memory interface 134. The general-purpose output controller 145 may directly access the effect data memories 123A to 123C. For example, motor data or light emission read from the effect data memories 123A to 123C by access by the CPU 130. It may be accessed indirectly by receiving the supply of data. The general-purpose output controller 145 outputs the motor data and light emission data read from the effect data memory 123C, or the display data supplied from the VDP 140 as serial signal data (serial data). The serial data output from the general-purpose output controller 145 may be transmitted to the drive control board 16B, the light emitter control board 16C, and the light emitter control board 16D via the effect control relay board 16A.

  For example, a NAND-ROM is used as a part or all of the ROM 121 and the effect data memories 123A to 123C mounted on the effect control board 12 as shown in FIGS. The stored contents may be rewritable. Such a rewritable memory may include a data area and a redundant area. The data area stores programs and data for executing various processes in a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1. The redundant area has an alternative area to be used in place of the defective area in the data area. The CPU 130 and the VDP 140 execute various processes based on the data stored in the data area and the data stored in the alternative area used in place of the defective area generated in the data area. Memory redundancy information may be stored in such a redundant area of the memory. The history information may be information related to memory recycling. As an example, the history information may include at least one of model identification information such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 in which a memory has been used and date information. In addition, the history information may include store identification information for each amusement store where the memory has been used. By storing history information in the redundant area of the memory in this way, there is no need to attach a barcode for recycling management outside the memory, and it is accurately recycled based on the history information stored in the memory. Management can be performed. Since the history information is stored in the redundant area, the history information does not affect the data area normally used, and the identity of the program and data can be ensured.

  Alternatively, the rewritable memory may include a control area that stores correspondence information indicating a correspondence relation between a defective area in the data area and an alternative area in the redundant area. The control area may store arrangement information indicating the storage position of the history information in the redundant area. Alternatively, a memory control unit that stores correspondence information and reads data based on the correspondence information is built in the memory, and the memory control unit is an arrangement that indicates a storage position of history information in the redundant area. Information may be stored. As described above, the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the defective area in the data area and the alternative area in the redundant area is stored, and the arrangement information indicating the storage position of the history information is stored, thereby reading data from the alternative area. Similarly to the above, it is possible to appropriately manage the reading of history information.

  FIG. 12 shows a configuration example of a light emitter control board 16C for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74. Various circuits for controlling lighting modes of the plurality of light emitters in the light emitter units 71 to 74 are mounted on the light emitter control board 16C. The light emitter control board 16C shown in FIG. 12 includes a buffer memory 151, a lighting data generation circuit 152, a serial output circuit 153, and a light emitter driver 154.

  The buffer memory 151 temporarily stores data transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 via the effect control relay board 16A. The data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 151 may correspond to the display data generated by the VDP 140 or the light emission data read from the effect data memory 123C. The lighting data generation circuit 152 reads the data stored in the buffer memory 151 and executes predetermined conversion processing to generate lighting data that constitutes the lighting control information. The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 152 includes drive control data serving as drive control information that specifies the drive timing of the light emitter, and a floor that specifies the luminance (gradation) corresponding to each light emission color of the light emitter. It is only necessary to include gradation data serving as tone control information.

  The lighting data generation circuit 152 divides a region where the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74 are arranged in each of the movable members 51 to 54 into a plurality of blocks, and the light emitters for each of the blocks. Create lighting data for. In this embodiment, the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 are set in advance as a plurality of blocks. The lighting data generation circuit 153 generates lighting data corresponding to each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42.

  FIG. 13 shows a setting example in which a region where a plurality of light emitters in the movable member 51 are arranged and arranged is divided into a plurality of blocks. The region where the plurality of light emitters are arranged on the movable member 51 is divided into light emitter blocks B01 to B06 as shown in FIG. 13A and light emitter blocks B07 to B15 as shown in FIG. Divided. Similarly to the movable member 51, the movable members 52 to 54 other than the movable member 51 are set so as to divide a region where a plurality of light emitters are arranged into a plurality of blocks. Thus, the entire light emitter units 71 to 74 provided in the movable members 51 to 54 are divided into light emitter blocks B01 to B42. It should be noted that the number of divisions of the light emitter block may be arbitrarily set based on the number of movable members constituting the effect movable mechanism 50, the size of a region where a plurality of light emitters are arranged, and the like. .

  Each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 has a rectangular shape such as a rectangle or a square as a basic shape. Therefore, due to the shape of the movable members 51 to 54, the area where the plurality of light emitters are arranged in each of the light emitter units 71 to 74 cannot be accommodated in the square light emitter block, and one light emission There may be a surplus area where light emitters less than the body block are arranged. In addition, among the plurality of light emitter blocks, there may be an empty area where the light emitter is not disposed in a part of the square shape. Therefore, by including a surplus area where light emitters less than one light emitter block are arranged in an empty area in any one of the light emitter blocks, the processing load of the lighting control for a plurality of light emitters is reduced.

  The serial output circuit 153 outputs a control signal including lighting control information corresponding to the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 152 to the light emitter driving unit 154 by a serial signal method. The control signal corresponding to the lighting data may include a drive control signal corresponding to the drive control data and a gradation data signal corresponding to the gradation data. The serial output circuit 153 has a plurality of signal output configurations (output circuit and output wiring) such as 21 systems as a serial output system for outputting a control signal. The serial output circuit 153 is connected to serial signal wirings corresponding to the 21 serial output systems K01 to K21, and outputs a control signal including lighting control information to each wiring by a serial signal system. As described above, the serial output circuit 153 outputs the control signal including the lighting control information to the serial signal lines of a plurality of systems by the serial signal method.

  FIG. 14 shows a connection setting example between the serial output system and the light emitter block. In the connection setting example shown in FIG. 14, connection is made so that two light emitter blocks among the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 are assigned to each of the serial output systems K01 to K21. For example, a light emitter driver for controlling lighting of the light emitter block B01 and the light emitter block B02 is connected to the serial output system K01 via a serial signal wiring. The serial output system K02 is connected to a light emitter block B03 and a light emitter driver for controlling the light emitter block B04 through serial signal wiring. Also in the serial output system K03 and later, a light emitter driver for controlling lighting of two light emitter blocks is connected to one serial output system. A plurality of light emitter drivers that perform lighting control of light emitters included in a light emitter block assigned to one serial output system may be connected by a serial bus system via serial signal wiring. In addition, it is not limited to what is connected by a serial bus system, A some light emitter driver may be connected in series (connected by a daisy chain system).

  The light emitter driving unit 154 shown in FIG. 12 includes a plurality of driver ICs (light emitter drivers) that control lighting of a plurality of light emitters included in regions divided into the light emitter blocks B01 to B42. . Each driver IC performs lighting control of a plurality of light emitters based on lighting control information indicated by a control signal transmitted from the serial output circuit 153 via the serial signal wiring. Each driver IC is configured to include, for example, a shift register, converts data transmitted by the serial signal system into data of a parallel signal system, and outputs the data to a plurality of signal lines. Each of the plurality of light emitter drivers has a strobe side driver IC serving as a drive control circuit that performs drive control of the light emitter in accordance with the drive control data indicated by the drive control signal, and gradation data indicated by the gradation data signal. Accordingly, the driver IC is classified into one of the digit-side driver ICs serving as a gradation control circuit that performs gradation control of the light emitter. In each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42, dynamic lighting control of a plurality of light emitters is performed for each light emitter block using a strobe side driver IC and a digit side driver IC. As shown in FIG. 12, in the light emitter control board 16C, the control signal transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 is sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board 16C. By doing so, each light emitter driver is configured to be transmitted.

  FIG. 15 shows a configuration example of a light emitter driver using a driver IC corresponding to the light emitter block B11 as a specific example. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 15, a strobe-side light emitter driver 411S, a digit upper light emitter driver 411DU, and a digit lower light emitter driver 411DD are provided as a plurality of light emitter drivers corresponding to the light emitter block B11. Is provided. The serial signal wiring of the serial output system K06 shown in FIG. 14 includes the strobe-side light emitter driver 411S corresponding to the light emitter block B11 from the serial output circuit 153, the digit upper light emitter driver 411DU, and the digit lower light emitter driver 411DD. And then connected to the light emitter driver provided corresponding to the light emitter block B12.

  Different address information is assigned to each of the light emitter driver 411S, the light emitter driver 411DU, and the light emitter driver 411DD. The serial output circuit 153 outputs a control signal indicating the lighting control information to which the address information is added to the serial signal wiring included in the serial output system K06, so that any of the plurality of light emitter drivers corresponding to the light emitter block B11 Transmit the lighting control information.

  The serial signal wiring may include a serial clock wiring for transmitting the serial clock SC and a serial data wiring for transmitting serial data SD synchronized with the serial clock SC. The light emitter driver connected to the serial signal wiring takes in drive control data or gradation data transmitted as serial data SD synchronized with the serial clock SC, and performs lighting control of the plurality of light emitters.

  The light emitter block B11 includes a half block B11U composed of a plurality of light emitters whose gradation is controlled by an upper digit emitter driver 411DU, and a plurality of light emitters whose gradation is controlled by a digit lower emitter driver 411DD. It is comprised with the combination with half block B11D comprised from these. Thus, each light emitter block only needs to be configured by a combination of half blocks that are modules smaller than the light emitter block. Note that the plurality of light emitter blocks is not limited to a combination of two half blocks. For example, among the plurality of light emitter blocks, a light emitter block constituted by only one half block may be included in addition to a light emitter block constituted by combining two half blocks. When the light emitter block B11 is composed of only one half block, the light emitter driver 411S on the strobe side and the light emitter driver 411DU on the upper digit side are provided, but the light emitter driver 411DD on the lower digit side is not provided. What is necessary is just composition. Thus, each light emitter block may be configured to include one strobe side light emitter driver and one or two digit side light emitter drivers.

  Half block B11U and half block B11D should just be comprised so that the number of light-emitting bodies may become the same number, respectively. For example, the strobe-side light emitter driver 411S is connected to 12 strobe signal lines, and outputs a strobe signal as a drive control signal for driving and controlling a plurality of light emitters arranged in 12 columns. The digit upper light emitter driver 411DU and the digit lower light emitter driver 411DD are each connected to eight digit signal lines, and gradation data for controlling gradation of a plurality of light emitters arranged in eight rows. The digit signal that becomes the signal is output. Therefore, both the half block B11U corresponding to the digit upper side and the half block B11D corresponding to the digit lower side are formed so as to include a total of 96 light emitters composed of 12 columns on the strobe side and 8 rows on the digit side. Yes. Similarly, the half blocks constituting the light emitter blocks other than the light emitter block B11 may be formed so as to include a total of 96 light emitters. Thus, the half blocks as modules constituting the light emitter block only need to be configured so that the same number of light emitters can be controlled to be turned on.

  Note that the number of light emitters included in one half block is not limited to 96 in total, and may be an arbitrary number determined in advance based on the specification and design of the light emitter driver. For example, when eight strobe signal lines are configured to drive and control a plurality of light emitters arranged in eight columns, a total of 64 light emitters comprising eight columns on the strobe side and eight rows on the digit side are provided. What is necessary is just to form so that it may be contained in one half block. Further, the number of light emitters that can be controlled to be lighted by one half block and the number of light emitters actually included in one half block do not always have to coincide with each other. For example, while the number of light emitters that can be controlled to light in one half block is 96, the number of light emitters actually included in one half block depends on the arrangement of the light emitters in the light emitter units 71 to 74. There may be fewer than 96. In this way, it is only necessary to control the lighting of a predetermined number of light emitters or less for each half block as a module smaller than a plurality of blocks obtained by dividing a region where a plurality of light emitters are arranged.

  The lighting data generation circuit 152 generates lighting data for performing dynamic lighting control of the plurality of light emitters for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. For example, as drive control data serving as drive control information for designating the drive timing of the light emitters, control data for time-sharing driving a plurality of light emitters at different timings for each strobe signal line is generated. Also, gradation data serving as gradation control information for designating luminance (gradation) for each emission color is generated by PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) control corresponding to a plurality of light emitters connected to each digit signal line. The light emitter driver on the digit side is not limited to the one that performs gradation control of the light emitter according to the output period of the pulse signal as in the PWM control method. For example, the number of pulse signals output within a certain period ( What is necessary is just to perform gradation control of the light emitter according to the physical quantity (pulse quantity) of the pulse signal, such as the number of pulses) and the amplitude (drive current value) of the pulse signal.

  The serial output circuit 153 outputs the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 152 to the serial signal wiring of the serial output system connected to the light emitter block to be controlled by the serial signal method. A strobe-side light emitter driver provided corresponding to each light emitter block drives and controls a plurality of light emitters connected to the strobe signal line by outputting a strobe signal based on the drive control data. The light emitter driver at the upper or lower digit provided for each light emitter block outputs a digit signal based on the grayscale data, so that multiple light emitters connected to the digit signal line can be grayscaled. Control. Thus, in each of the light emitter units 71 to 74, the plurality of light emitters arranged in a row emit light at a duty ratio corresponding to the digit signal during the light emission drive period in which the strobe signal is turned on, and the plurality of light emitter blocks For each of B01 to B42, the lighting mode can be changed by a dynamic lighting method (also referred to as a pulse lighting method, a duty lighting method, or a time division lighting method). In this way, by configuring the dynamic lighting control to be performed for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42, the light emitter driving unit 154 can perform lighting control using a plurality of light emitter drivers in parallel. .

  FIG. 16A shows a configuration example of the drive control board 16B. As shown in FIG. 16A, a motor drive driver 412 and an actuator drive driver 412A are mounted on the drive control board 16B. The motor drive driver 412 receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 16A. The motor drive driver 412 performs drive control of the operation motors 60A, 60B, and 60C based on the drive control information indicated by the input control signal. The actuator drive driver 412A receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 16A. Then, the actuator drive driver 412A performs drive control of the actuators 172A, 172B, and 172C based on the drive control information indicated by the input control signal.

  Note that detection signals from the movable member position sensor 61 and the origin sensors 171A to 171D are also input to the drive control board 16B, and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 via the effect control relay board 16A. However, the description is omitted in the example shown in FIG.

  FIG. 16B shows a configuration example of the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F for performing lighting control of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c. As shown in FIG. 16 (2), a light emitter driver 413b is mounted on the light emitter control board 16D. The light emitter driver 413b receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 16A. Then, the light emitter driver 413b performs lighting control of the left frame LED 9b based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal. In FIG. 16B, the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F are connected to each other via a wiring member such as a flexible cable or a wire harness.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16B, a light emitter driver 413a is mounted on the light emitter control board 16E. The light emitter driver 413a receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 via the effect control relay board 16A and further via the light emitter control board 16D in a serial signal format. Entered. Then, the light emitter driver 413a performs lighting control of the top LED 9a based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16B, a light emitter driver 413c is mounted on the light emitter control board 16F. The light emitter driver 413c receives a control signal from the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 via the effect control relay board 16A and further via the light emitter control board 16D and the light emitter control board 16E. Are input in a serial signal format. Then, the light emitter driver 413c performs lighting control of the right frame LED 9c based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (2), in the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F, control signals transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 120 of the effect control board 12 are respectively sent to different light emitter control boards 16D to 16F. By sequentially transmitting between the mounted light emitter drivers 413a to 413c, the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c are transmitted to the respective light emitter drivers 413a to 413c.

  In this embodiment, each LED provided in the gaming machine frame 3 is comprehensively expressed as a top frame LED 9a, a left frame LED 9b, and a right frame LED 9c. Specifically, the gaming machine A plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided as top frame LEDs 9a above the frame 3, and a plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided as left frame LEDs 9b on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. It is assumed that a plurality of light emitters (color LEDs or single color LEDs) are provided as the right frame LED 9c on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3.

  Further, in this embodiment, a light emitter driver (for example, the light emitter drivers 411S, 411DU, and 411DD shown in FIG. 15) for controlling the lighting of the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74. The light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the motor drive driver 412, the actuator drive driver 412A, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c are the same type of serial- This is realized using a parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)). FIG. 17 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a serial-parallel conversion circuit used as the light emitter driver 411, the motor drive driver 412, the actuator drive driver 412A, and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG.

  Note that the serial-parallel conversion circuit used as the light emitter driver 411, the motor drive driver 412, the actuator drive driver 412A, and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c has an input serial signal format signal in a 24-channel parallel signal format. There are two types, one that converts the signal into a signal and outputs the other, and one that converts the input serial signal format signal into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal. 17 and FIG. 18 are representative of the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, and the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion will be described. Only the different parts of the circuit will be described. In this embodiment, the luminous body driver 411 and the actuator driving driver 412A are realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, and the motor driving driver 412 and the luminous body drivers 413a to 413c are serial-parallel for 12 channels. This is realized by a conversion circuit.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the serial-parallel conversion circuit receives a clock signal from the effect control microcomputer 120 via the effect control relay board 16A and the light emitter control boards 16D and 16E. A / I terminal and a DATA / I terminal for inputting data are provided. In addition, a part of the input clock signal and data is branched in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, and can be directly output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit. A DATA / O terminal for through output is provided.

  For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16 (2), the light emitter driver 413b of the light emitter control board 16D receives a control signal (clock signal and data) input via the effect control relay board 16A. Is output to the light emitter driver 413a of the light emitter control board 16E, and the clock signal and the data are emitted from the CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit realizing the light emitter driver 413b, respectively. It is configured to be output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that implements the body driver 413a. Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16B, the light emitter driver 413a of the light emitter control board 16E is input via the effect control relay board 16A and the light emitter control board 16D. The control signal (clock signal and data) is output to the light emitter driver 413c of the light emitter control board 16F. The CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit for realizing the light emitter driver 413a. The clock signal and the data are output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that implements the light emitter driver 413c.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the clock signal input from the CLK / I terminal and the other part of the data input from the DATA / I terminal are input to the decoder and are converted into 24 channels from the serial signal format. Are decoded into parallel signal format signals. Then, after being stored once in each register provided in the register block, pulse width modulation (PWM) is performed using an internal clock signal (in this example, an internal clock signal of 6 MHz) by an internal oscillation clock circuit. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the case of a 12-channel circuit, it is converted into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal and output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11. The output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are supplied to a light emitter such as an LED or to an operation motor.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with terminals AD0 to AD4 (AD0 to AD5 for a 12-channel circuit) for inputting decode addresses. By setting each to H (high) or L (low), it is possible to set an address for each serial-parallel conversion circuit. Data input from DATA / I also includes address information, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit decodes only data that matches the address set in the address information included in the input data into a signal of a parallel signal format. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23.

  In the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, since five terminals AD0 to AD4 are provided for decoding address input, a maximum of 32 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 32 serial-parallel conversions are possible. Circuits can be connected. In the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, since six terminals AD0 to AD5 are provided for decoding address input, a maximum of 64 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 64 serial-parallel conversions are possible. Circuits can be connected.

  The S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the slew rate of the through output of the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the through output of the data output from the DATA / O terminal. . When the S terminal is set to L (low), the clock signal and data through output is set to a normal slew rate output, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the clock signal and data through output has a low slew rate. Set to output.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the slew rate setting of the clock signal and data through output. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the S terminal is set to L (low) and set to normal slew rate output, the rising and falling slopes of the clock signal and data waveforms (voltage change per unit time) Amount) is somewhat large. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19 (2), when the S terminal is set to H (high) and set to a low slew rate output, the clock signal and The rising and falling slopes of the data waveform become gentle.

  In general, in order to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate, it is better to keep the slew rate low, and it is better to set it to the low slew rate output shown in FIG. On the other hand, in order to ensure tolerance to noise, it is better that the rising and falling slopes of the waveform are larger, and it is better to set the normal slew rate output shown in FIG.

  Note that the setting of the S terminal is not only to set the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the waveform of the through output of the data output from the DATA / O terminal, but also to the clock signal and DATA input from the CLK / I terminal. A function of compensating the output waveform for data input from the / I terminal is provided. That is, generally, the clock signal and data output from the production control microcomputer 120 or the like are output as a rectangular wave at the output stage, but the CLK / I terminal and the DATA / I terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. When there is a large transmission loss due to the wiring until reaching, a clock signal or data having a waveform broken from the original rectangular wave may be input. In this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion circuit does not simply output the input clock signal or data as it is, but in this way the clock signal or data input in a state of a waveform broken from the original rectangular wave. Has a function of compensating for and outputting a waveform close to the original rectangular wave. In this case, if the output of the normal slew rate is set by the setting of the S terminal, the output signal is compensated for a waveform having a large rising or falling slope, so that the output signal is in a state closer to the original rectangular wave. Can be output, and the influence of external noise can be reduced. However, since the voltage change amount increases momentarily when the rising or falling slope is large, there is a risk that radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate will increase. On the other hand, if the output of the low slew rate is set by setting the S terminal, the waveform is compensated and output with a smaller rising and falling slope. Although it is weak against the influence of noise, the instantaneous voltage change amount can be reduced, and radio wave radiation outside the substrate can be suppressed from increasing.

  In addition, it may be configured to enable or disable the function for compensating the output waveform, and all the functions for compensating the output waveform may be disabled. The function of compensating the output waveform may be realized outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit by providing an amplifier circuit or the like outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit.

  Furthermore, in the normal slew rate output setting described above, compensation was made so that the rising and falling slopes of the output waveform were larger than the rising and falling slopes of the input waveform. As an output setting, the input waveform may be output as it is without compensating the output waveform (that is, the output waveform having a rising edge equivalent to the rising edge of the input waveform as a predetermined mode). In this case, in the low slew rate output setting, it is only necessary to output a waveform whose slope is smaller than the rising edge of the input waveform.

  A T terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting a time-out reset function for signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. Setting the T terminal to L (low) sets the timeout reset function to an invalid state, and setting the terminal to H (high) sets the timeout reset function to an enabled state.

  When the T terminal is set to H (high) and the time-out reset function is enabled, the clock signal and data are input from the CLK / I terminal and the DATA / I terminal, and the signal output is output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. After the start, when a predetermined period (1 second in this example) elapses, it is assumed that a time-out has occurred, and the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are automatically reset (output stopped). Therefore, when the time-out reset function is set to the valid state, when it is desired to continuously supply signals to the LEDs and the operation motor from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, for example, at least from the production control microcomputer 120 It is necessary to repeatedly output a control signal every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second).

  A Q / S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting a drive system of signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. When the Q / S terminal is set to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs. Further, when the Q / S terminal is set to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be the sync output.

  The Q / I terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting whether to invert the output logic of signals output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. When the Q / I terminal is set to L (low), the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be normally output without being inverted. When the Q / I terminal is set to H (high), the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted.

  The R terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a current reference setting terminal. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17, the R terminal is connected to each of the drive output terminals A0 to A23 via a constant current circuit, and an external resistor having an arbitrary resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). By connecting resistors, it is possible to set the drive current values of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 within a predetermined range (for example, 4 mA to 20 mA).

  The VP terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a protective electrostatic protection terminal. A power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal. That is, if a power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal, an overvoltage higher than the power supply voltage can be released. When a plurality of types of power supply voltages are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the power supply voltage having the higher voltage value may be connected to the VP terminal.

  Next, the control data format of data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a control data format. The basic control data format of data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit is composed of the common format shown in FIG. 20 (1) and the basic format shown in FIG. 20 (2).

  As shown in FIG. 20 (1), the common format includes a 9-bit header (HD), a 4-bit device ID (ID), a 5-bit decode address AD0 to AD4 (see FIGS. 17 and 18), and 1 Consists of bit EX data. The EX data is for setting whether the control data format following the common format is a basic format or an extended format described later, and EX = 0 is set in the basic format.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (2), the basic format includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. For example, when transmitting data for LED lighting control, by setting and transmitting 6-bit data in time series for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, the lighting control including LED gradation control is performed. It can be carried out.

  As the control data format, an extended format can be used instead of the basic format shown in FIG. Specifically, if EX = 1 is set in the common format shown in FIG. 20 (1), the control data format following the common format becomes the extended format shown in FIG. 20 (3).

  As shown in FIG. 20 (3), the extended format includes 1-bit binary data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the extended format, the data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is composed of 1 bit, so that the control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit can be reduced. For example, if the operation motor is driven and controlled using a serial-parallel conversion circuit, gradation control and the like need not be performed unlike the case where lighting control of a light emitter such as an LED is performed. It is effective to use an extended format as shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 20, the control data format used in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described. However, in the control data format used in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, for example, the common control data format shown in FIG. The difference is that the format includes 6-bit decode addresses AD0 to AD5. Further, for example, the basic format shown in FIG. 20 (2) is different in that it is shorter because it includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels. Furthermore, for example, the extended format shown in FIG. 20 (3) is different in that it is short because it is configured to include binary data of 1 bit for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels.

  Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is configured so that the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is dispersed to spread the spectrum, thereby preventing radiation noise and suppressing radio wave radiation. . FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. In this embodiment, the internal oscillation clock circuit built in the serial-parallel conversion circuit outputs a 6 MHz clock signal. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 21, the 6 MHz internal clock signal is converted to a 1 MHz 6-phase clock signal. The drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, group 1 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q0 to Q3, group 2 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q4 to Q7, and drive output terminals Q8 to Q8. Group 3 is composed of four channels Q11, group 4 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q12 to Q15, group 5 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q16 to Q19, and drive output terminals Q20 to Q23. Group 6 is composed of four channels. As shown in FIG. 21, the signal output timing is the same between the drive output terminals in the same group (for example, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 in the group 1), but the drive output terminals ( For example, the output timing is distributed between the drive output terminal Q0 of group 1 and the drive output terminal Q4) of group 2.

  In FIG. 21, the output timing of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described. However, in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, an internal clock signal of 6 MHz The signals are separated into three-phase clock signals, and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are grouped into three groups of four channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

  Next, a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 21 is used as the light emitter driver 411, the motor drive driver 412, and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c will be described. 22 to 24 are explanatory diagrams for explaining connection examples of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Among these, FIG. 22 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter driver 411 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74. FIG. 23 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 60A to 60C. FIG. 24 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c.

  First, a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter driver 411 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, a light emitter driver 411 for performing lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74 is realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. The

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD4, AD0 and AD1 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD2 to AD4 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 00001 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. Note that FIG. 22 is an example, and since the light emitter units 71 to 74 include a plurality of light emitter drivers, a different decode address is set for each light emitter driver.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the light emitter drivers 411 for performing lighting control of the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74 are all mounted on the same light emitter control board 16C. Since the transmission of the control signal between the illuminant drivers is performed on the same illuminant control board 16C (transmission across the board is not performed), the resistance to noise does not need to be so much concerned. In view of this, by setting the through output of the clock signal and the data to a low slew rate output, the radio wave radiation from the substrate is rather suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). Accordingly, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set so as to be normally output without being inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, the power supply voltage VCL (5 V) is connected to the VP terminal, and protection is performed so as to release an overvoltage of 5 V or more.

  Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 22, each drive output terminal Q0-Q23 is connected to the some light-emitting body which comprises the light-emitting body units 71-74. In the example shown in FIG. 22, for convenience, a diagram in which one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal is shown. However, when a color LED is connected as the light emitter, RGB is used. You may comprise so that three terminals may be connected to one color LED, and if a single color LED is used as a light-emitting body, you may comprise so that one terminal may be connected to one single color LED. . Further, for example, a plurality of single color LEDs may be connected in series to one terminal.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22, the case where the light emitters are connected to all of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is shown. However, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q0 are changed according to the number and arrangement of the light emitters. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q23, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

  Next, a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the motor drive driver 412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 60A to 60C will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the motor drive driver 412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 60A to 60C is realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5, AD0 to AD2 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD3 to AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 000111 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. FIG. 23 is an example, and another value may be set as the decode address.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16 (1), since the control signal is not transmitted between the motor driver 412 and another driver, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). Connection (set to L (low)) may be set so that the through output of the clock signal and data becomes the output of the normal slew rate.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to become sink outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to H (high). Thus, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, the power supply voltage VCC (5V) is connected to the VP terminal, and protection is performed so as to release an overvoltage of 5V or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q0 to Q3 of the group 1 having the same output timing are connected to the first operation motor 60A. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing are connected to the second operation motor 60B. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the four channel terminals Q8 to Q11 of the group 3 having the same output timing are connected to the third operating motor 60C.

  As already described, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is distributed by being grouped into three groups of groups 1-3. If the output timing differs between signals output to the same operating motor, the driving accuracy of the operating motor may not be maintained. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the signals input to the same operation motor are connected to the drive output terminals belonging to the same group, and the drive accuracy of the operation motor is thus set. It prevents the situation that can not be maintained.

  Conversely, for example, when connecting to the light emitters of the light emitter units 71 to 74 described in FIG. 22, or when connecting to the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c of FIG. In the case of connecting to the light source, since the problem of the driving accuracy as described above does not occur, even if the output timing is different among the signals output to the respective light emitters, there is no such trouble. Therefore, when the output signal from the drive output terminal is connected to a light emitter such as an LED, there is no need to worry about the output timing.

  Next, a connection example (not shown) when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as an actuator drive driver 412A for performing drive control of the actuators 172A to 172D will be described. Only differences from the motor drive driver 412 will be described here. In this embodiment, the actuator drive driver 412A for performing drive control of the actuators 172A to 172D is realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit.

  In the actuator drive driver 412A, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, the four channel terminals Q0 to Q3 of the group 1 having the same output timing are connected to the first actuator 172A. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, the terminals of the four channels Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing are connected to the second actuator 172B. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, the terminals of the four channels Q8 to Q11 of group 3 having the same output timing are connected to the third actuator 172C. And among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, the terminals of the four channels Q12 to Q15 of the group 4 having the same output timing are connected to the fourth actuator 172D.

  Next, a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for performing lighting control of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. The

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, among the decode address input terminals AD0 to AD5, AD0 to AD3 are connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), AD4 and AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decode address is 001111 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. Note that FIG. 24 is an example, and there are three light emitter drivers 413a to 413c. Therefore, different decode addresses are set for the respective light emitter drivers 413a to 413c.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the S terminal to L (low), the through output of the clock signal and data is set to the normal slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16 (2), the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c are different light emitter control boards 16D. Since the control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers mounted on ˜16F and mounted on different substrates, the influence of noise is large. Thus, the clock signal and data through output is set to a normal slew rate output so as to ensure resistance to noise.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are set to be constant current outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). Accordingly, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is set so as to be normally output without being inverted.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistance of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, the power supply voltage VDL (12 V) is connected to the VP terminal. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 24, the serial-parallel conversion circuit uses a 12V power supply voltage (VDL) and a 5V power supply voltage (VCL, VCC). The power supply voltage VDL is connected to the V terminal and is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 12V or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are connected to a plurality of light emitters as the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c. In the example shown in FIG. 24, for convenience, one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal, or three light emitters (for example, single color LEDs) that perform the same control are connected in series. However, when a color LED is connected as a light emitter, three terminals for RGB may be connected to one color LED.

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, the case where the light emitters are connected to all of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is shown. However, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q0 are changed according to the number and arrangement of the light emitters. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q11, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

  As shown in FIGS. 22 to 24, in this embodiment, the T terminals of the light emitter driver 411, the motor drive driver 412, and the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c are set to H (high), respectively, and the time-out function is effective. Set to state. In this embodiment, for example, the effect control microcomputer 120 includes a plurality of light emitters, top frame LEDs 9a, left frame LEDs 9b, and the like constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74 in the effect control process (to be described later) (see step S65). A control signal for controlling the lighting of the right frame LED 9c or a control signal for driving and controlling the operation motors 60A to 60C is output, but the timeout function is set to an effective state. When the control signal is output only once, the output signal from each drive output terminal is automatically reset after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) has elapsed, and lighting control and drive control cannot be continued. Therefore, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 120 repeatedly outputs a control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) in, for example, the later-described production control process (see step S65). Accordingly, the lighting control of the plurality of light emitters and the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74 is continuously executed, and the drive control of the operation motors 60A to 60C is continued. It is controlled to be executed.

  In this embodiment, the time-out function is set to the valid state as described above, and the light emitter driver 411, the motor drive driver 412, and the light emitter driver are provided every predetermined period (1 second in this example). Since the outputs from the drive output terminals 413a to 413c are automatically stopped, for example, after the drive control of the operation motors 60A to 60C is performed, the operation motors 60A to 60C are stopped. In spite of the control, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation motors 60A to 60C are not stopped due to a signal loss or malfunction, and the operation motors 60A to 60C are burned. .

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22 to 24, the case where the T terminal is uniformly set to H (high) and the time-out function is set to the valid state is shown. However, the setting of the valid state and invalid state of the timeout function may be properly used according to the usage. For example, for the motor drive driver, while setting the time-out function to an effective state from the viewpoint of preventing burn-in of the motor for operation, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right Unlike the operation motors 60A to 60C, the light emitting body such as the frame LED 9c does not cause problems such as burn-in, so the T terminal is set to L (low) and the timeout function is set to an invalid state. Also good.

  In this embodiment, in order to continuously execute lighting control and drive control, the production control microcomputer 120 repeatedly outputs a control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example). Although shown, it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, an output circuit (output IC) is provided separately from the effect control microcomputer 120 (may be provided on the effect control board 12 or on another board such as the effect control relay board 16A), When the production control microcomputer 120 outputs the control signal once, the output circuit repeatedly outputs the control signal at least every predetermined period (in this example, 1 second) based on the control signal output once. You may comprise as follows.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22 to 24, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V), and the T terminal is physically set to H (high) on the hardware so that time-out occurs. Although the case where the reset function is set to the valid state is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, by connecting the T terminal to the T terminal setting register and changing the set value of the register by a setting signal from the effect control microcomputer 120, the time-out function is enabled or disabled in software. You may comprise so that it can set.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22 to 24, an external resistor having a predetermined resistance value (10 kΩ in this example) is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND), and the drive output terminal Q0. Drive current values of all outputs of .about.Q23, Q0 to Q11 are set to 15 mA. Here, since a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) having an internal reference resistance also exists, the serial-parallel conversion circuit having such an internal reference resistance is used as a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver. It can be considered that the internal reference resistor is used, but in general, the built-in reference resistor included in the serial-parallel conversion circuit has a fixed driving current value (for example, fixed 20 mA) or a large error (for example, Error ± 30%). Therefore, in this embodiment, by connecting an external resistor between the R terminal and the ground (GND) and using an external reference resistor, an appropriate driving current value (15 mA in this example) is set, An error is also suggested (in this example, an error of ± 3%).

  In addition, as a light emitter driver and a motor drive driver, a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) that can use both an internal reference resistor and an external reference resistor can be used depending on the application. May be. For example, when a plurality of light emitters such as LEDs are densely provided like the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74 shown in this embodiment, an effect is produced when the light emission is sparse. Therefore, an error may be reduced by using an external reference resistor. On the other hand, when controlling the lighting of an LED that is used independently, such as for error notification, there is no such obstacle in production, and the error may be somewhat large, so an internal reference resistor is used. Also good.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the electrical components (in this example, the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, the right frame LED 9c, the movable member) Control means for controlling the operation motors 60A to 60C for operating 51 to 54 and the actuators 172A to 172D for driving the movable members 173 and 175) (in this example, the production control microcomputer 120), and control Output means for outputting specific signals (in this example, output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving the electrical components in accordance with a control signal by the serial communication method from the means. In the example, the light emitter driver 411, the motor drive driver 412, the actuator drive driver 412A, and the light emitter driver 413a. Equipped with a 413c) and. The output means outputs the output state when the input control signal is output to the other output means in a first output state in which the waveform rises in a change manner equal to or higher than that of the input control signal (in this example, a normal output state). The output state can be set to either the output state of the slew rate) or the second output state (in this example, the output state of the low slew rate) in which the waveform rises more slowly than the first output state. (In this example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), the output is set to a normal slew rate, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), the output is set to a low slew rate). Therefore, the setting can be changed according to the use environment, and the radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed according to the setting, while the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. Specifically, if it is set to a low slew rate output state, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed, and if it is set to a normal slew rate output state, the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be increased. .

  Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (in this example, as shown in FIG. 12, a plurality of light emitter drivers are provided on the light emitter control board 16C. The control signal is sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board 16C). In this case, the output means is set to the second output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 22, in the light emitter driver 411 mounted on the light emitter control board 16C, the S terminal is H ( High) and low slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means are provided in the same substrate, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided on another board connected via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) to the board on which the output means is provided ( In this example, as shown in FIG. 16 (2), the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c are mounted on different light emitter control boards 16D to 16F, and are mounted on the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F having different control signals. Are sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c). In this case, the output means is set to the first output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 24, S is used in the light emitter drivers 413a to 413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 16D to 16F). The terminal is set to L (low) and set to the normal slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means is provided on another substrate connected via the wiring member, it is possible to increase the noise resistance of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the circuit board generally has high noise resistance. Therefore, in the connection relation in the circuit board, priority is given to suppression of radio wave radiation and the output state is set to a low slew rate to obtain a gentle signal waveform. On the other hand, wiring members connected between boards (for example, flexible cables and wire harnesses) have low noise resistance, so in an abandoned relationship between circuit boards, priority is given to noise resistance and rectangular waves are output as normal slew rates. The signal waveform is close to. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to increase noise resistance of a control signal for preventing malfunction while suppressing radio wave radiation to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22 to 24, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCC (5 V) or the ground (GND), and the S terminal is physically H on the hardware. (High) is set to the low slew rate output state, or L (low) is set to the normal slew rate output state. It cannot be caught. For example, the S terminal is connected to the S terminal setting register, and the setting value of the register is changed by a setting signal from the production control microcomputer 120, so that a low slew rate output state is achieved in terms of software. You may comprise so that it can set whether it is set as the output state of a slew rate.

  Further, in this embodiment, transmission of a control signal according to a low slew rate output state between output means (in this example, light emitter drivers) mounted on the same board, or output means mounted on different boards Although the case where the board | substrate (in this example, the light-emitting body control boards 16C-16F) in which only any one of the transmission of the control signal by the output state of the normal slew rate is performed is shown, such an aspect It cannot be caught. For example, when a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on one light emitter control board, a control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board. In addition, it may be configured such that a control signal is transmitted to a light emitter driver mounted on another light emitter control board. In this case, for example, even if the light emitter driver is mounted on the same light emitter control board, the one that transmits the control signal between the light emitter drivers is set to the low slew rate output state, and the other light emitters are set. A device that outputs a control signal to the light-emitting driver mounted on the control board may be configured to be set to a normal slew rate output state.

  Also, even when a control signal is transmitted between light emitter drivers mounted on the same light emitter control board, the output state is not necessarily set to a low slew rate. When a control signal output from one mounted light emitter driver is branched on the substrate, the output state may be set to a normal slew rate. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification in the case where a control signal output from one light emitter driver mounted on the light emitter control board is branched on the board.

  In Modification 1 shown in FIG. 25, a control signal (clock signal and data through output) output from one light emitter driver 413d mounted on the light emitter control board 16G is branched on the board, The case where the control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413e on the same light emitter control board 16G and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413f on the same light emitter control board 16G is shown. As shown in the first modification, even when the control signal is branched and transmitted to the other light emitter drivers 413e and 413f even on the same light emitter control board 16G, the control signal is attenuated by the branch. And is susceptible to noise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 25, the S terminal may be set to L (low) to be set to a normal slew rate output state to increase the noise resistance of the control signal.

  In Modification 2 shown in FIG. 25, a control signal (clock signal and data through output) output from one light emitter driver 413g mounted on the light emitter control board 16H is branched on the board, The control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver 413h on the same light emitter control board 16H, and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the light emitter driver (not shown) on the external light emitter control board (not shown). The case is shown. As shown in the second modification, even when the other branched control signal is transmitted to the external board, the control signal is attenuated by the branch and easily affected by noise, as in the first modification. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 25, the S terminal may be set to L (low) to be set to a normal slew rate output state to increase the noise resistance of the control signal.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the output means specifies from the specific signal output units (in this example, the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped into a plurality of different groups by the parallel communication method. A signal (in this example, an output signal from each of the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) is output (in this example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, one group as shown in FIG. In other words, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, each group is divided into three groups of four channels). And the output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group (in this example, as shown in FIG. 21, the output timing of the output signals from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11 is a group. Everywhere). Therefore, the output timing of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 can be dispersed to spread the spectrum, prevent the generation of radiation noise, and further suppress the radio wave radiation from the substrate. .

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the movable member (in this example, the movable members 51-54) which performs operation | movement is provided. Further, the driving means for operating the movable member (in this example, the operation motors 60A to 60C) are driven based on the specific signal output from the specific signal output unit of the same group of the output means (in this example, As shown in FIG. 23, signals input to the same operation motor are connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the output unit stops the output of the specific signal after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) after inputting the control signal (in this example, the time-out function). (In this example, the time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high). See FIG. 18). For this reason, it is possible to avoid malfunctions due to wiring problems and to control the electrical components stably.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal is provided (in this example, the production control microcomputer 120 is, for example, production control process processing (see step S65)). In the above, by repeatedly outputting a control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example), the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 71 to 74, the top frame LED 9a, the left frame LED 9b, and the right frame LED 9c The lighting control is continuously executed or the drive control of the operation motors 60A to 60C is continuously executed). Therefore, it is possible to realize control corresponding to the stop function of the output means.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the output means can set the stop function to be valid or invalid (in this example, the timeout function is set to the invalid state by setting the T terminal to L (low)). The time-out function is set to the valid state by setting the T terminal to H (high) (see FIG. 18). Therefore, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce the cost by sharing parts.

  FIGS. 26A and 26B show a configuration example for connecting the effect control board 12 and the effect control relay board 16A. As shown in FIG. 26A, the effect control board 12 and the effect control relay board 16A are physically connected to the effect control board 12 by inserting a connector (plug) provided at one end of the harness HN1. In addition, a connector (socket) CN1 for electrical connection is provided. As shown in FIG. 26B, the effect control relay board 12 and the effect control relay board 16A are inserted into the effect control relay board 16A by inserting a connector (plug) provided at the other end of the harness HN1. Is provided with a connector (socket) CN2 for physically and electrically connecting the two. The harness HN1 only needs to be configured by binding a number of wiring cables. The connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 12 includes terminals TM01 to TM24. The connector CN11 provided on the effect control relay board 16A includes terminals TN01 to TN24. The terminals TM01 to TM24 included in the connector CN01 and the terminals TN01 to TN24 included in the connector CN11 have corresponding numbers (for example, the terminal TM01 and the terminal TN01) when the harness HN1 is attached to the connector CN01 and the connector CN11. Any relationship that is physically and electrically connected is acceptable.

  FIG. 26C shows an input / output content setting example corresponding to the terminals TM01 to TM24 provided in the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 12. Terminals TM01 to TM24 included in the connector CN01 can provide various voltages such as ground (GND), VSL (AC24V is rectified and smoothed), VDL (DC12V), and VCL (DC5V). In addition, terminals TM01 to TM24 are terminals TM03 and TM04 for supplying data signals and clock signals for driver ICs mounted on the drive control board 16B and the light emitter control boards 16C to 16F, and various data by a serial signal system. Terminals TM05 to TM08 for transmitting and receiving are included. Furthermore, the signal SM1 used for confirming the connection with the effect control relay board 16A can be input to the terminal TM22 among the terminals TM01 to TM24. As shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the voltage of VCL output from the terminals TM20 and TM21 of the connector CN01 is the terminal of the connector CN11 provided on the effect control relay board 16A via the harness HN1. It is supplied to TN20 and TN21. The terminals TN20 to TN22 of the connector CN11 only need to be short-circuited on the board of the effect control relay board 16A. Therefore, when the harness HN1 is connected, a voltage corresponding to VCL is supplied from the terminal TN22 of the connector CN11 to the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 12 via the harness HN1. The On the other hand, when the harness HN1 is not connected, the voltage is not supplied to the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 12.

  FIG. 27A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is a control for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable accessory control data, and an end code. It is comprised from data, and the content of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. should just be set in time series. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the CPU 130. A determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11 or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the CPU 130. Corresponding to the control content and processing content, data indicating the switching timing of the production control may be set.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data that designates the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation corresponding to an operation on the operation unit.

  The movable accessory control data is data for designating the rendering operations of the movable accessory 173, the movable accessory 175, and the movable members 51-54. Based on the movable accessory control data, the CPU 130 controls the movable accessory 173, the movable accessory 175, and the movable members 51 to 54 to produce an effect operation in a predetermined operation pattern via the drive control board 16B. The movable combination control data includes at least one operation pattern of the movable combination 173, the movable combination 175, and the movable members 51 to 54. However, the movable combination control data may include a plurality of operation patterns of the movable combination 173, the movable combination 175, and the movable members 51 to 54. For example, the movable combination control data may include an operation pattern in which the movable combination 173 or the movable combination 175 operates strongly and an operation pattern in which the movable combination 175 operates weakly. The strong motion is, for example, an operation pattern in which the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 operates large or for a long time in the movable range. On the other hand, the weak operation is an operation pattern in which the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 operates in a movable range smaller or in a shorter time than the strong operation. When the movable combination control data includes a plurality of operation patterns of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175, the CPU 130 may select and execute the operation pattern according to the rendering conditions. For example, the CPU 130 may select a strong motion pattern during a super reach effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a big hit effect, and the like, and may select a weak motion pattern during a normal reach. The movable combination 173, the movable combination 175, and the movable members 51 to 54 operate in a plurality of operation patterns, so that the interest can be improved.

  Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  The effect control pattern may include control data for controlling the initial operation of the effect device. As described above, the initial operation of the effect device is, for example, for confirming the operation of the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 173, the movable accessory 175, and the movable members 51 to 54. The operation to be performed. CPU 130 can perform the initial operation of the effect device in a predetermined operation pattern by executing the effect control pattern including the operation pattern of the initial operation of the effect device. The plurality of operation patterns of the initial operation can be realized by preparing a plurality of effect control patterns for executing the initial operation and selecting a predetermined effect control pattern from the plurality of effect control patterns. . The effect control pattern selected in the initial operation may be designated based on the EXT data XX of the initialization designation command E0XXH, for example. The presentation control pattern selected in the initial operation may be selected based on a predetermined condition by the CPU 130 that has received the initialization designation command or the power failure restoration designation command.

  FIG. 27B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations that are executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. CPU 130 determines the control content of the rendering operation according to various control data included in the rendering control pattern. For example, when the production control process timer value matches any of the production control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the production control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, which is specified by the operation detection control data. Control is performed in which the operation content is determined by receiving an operation on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the operation effective period, which is an operation effective period. Further, the CPU 130 performs control to operate the movable combination 173, the movable combination 175, and the movable members 51 to 54 in a manner specified by the movable combination control data. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The rendering operation shown in FIG. 27B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, in order to execute the presentation operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbols (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the production control pattern, the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If the production control process timer value matches, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data is performed. Control. As described above, the CPU 130 performs the rendering device (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the rendering control pattern. 173, the movable accessory 175, and the movable members 51 to 54) are advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the production control pattern set in this way is output from the CPU 130 to the audio control board 13, the production control relay board 16A, and the like. In the voice control board 13 that receives a command from the CPU 130, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like.

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 28A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. As a specific example, the production control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the probability change flag, data indicating the on state or the off state, and the like for each of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. The effect control counter setting unit 193 also stores data indicating an effect number count value, which is a stored value of an effect number counter for counting one or both of the number of time reductions and the number of probability changes.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, a start opening winning designation command (first starting slot winning designation command), a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, a storage area is secured so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first reserved memory number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The CPU 130 stores the commands in the order received at the time of the first starting prize from the head in the empty area of the first starting prize received command buffer 194A. At the time of the first start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the first start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the first reserved memory number notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 28 (B), in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation The category command and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 28B, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 28 (B) are deleted one by one every time the decorative symbol variable display is started in synchronization with the first special game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the first special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the first start opening prize designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, when the decorative symbol variable display is started in synchronization with the first special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 28B, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “3” is changed to the buffer number “2”. Shifted.

  In the present embodiment, the data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. The second start winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved storage number. . When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening, a start opening winning specifying command (second starting opening winning specifying command), a symbol specifying command, a variable category command, a reserved memory number notification command (second reserved memory number notifying command) ) Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured so that among these commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a pending storage count notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The CPU 130 stores the commands in the order received at the second start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. At the time of the second start winning, command transmission is performed in the order of the second start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 28 (C), the second start opening prize designation command, symbol designation command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. The variable category command and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 28C, the commands are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 28C are deleted one by one every time the decorative symbol variable display is started in synchronization with the second special game. Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (in order of winning among commands). Specifically, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second start opening prize designation command is displayed. One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponding to the second start opening winning designation command) Command) is shifted while maintaining the winning order (buffer number size relationship).

  For example, when the decorative symbol variable display is started in synchronization with the second special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 28C, the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “1” is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is shifted to the buffer number “1”.

  In the present embodiment, the data constituting the first prefetch notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 28D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The first prefetch notice buffer 194C is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents of the decision concerning the prefetch notice effect related to each hold information determined by the CPU 130 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. When the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 28B due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the first prefetch notice buffer 194C, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the second prefetch notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 28E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second prefetch notice buffer 194D is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents of the decision concerning the prefetch notice effect relating to each hold information decided by the CPU 130 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 28C due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the second prefetch notice buffer 194D, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. Further, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. When the number is shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  First, the operation of the gaming control microcomputer 100 when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 100. In FIG. 29, when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 (specifically, The CPU 103) starts a main process after step S001 after executing a security check process that is a process for confirming whether or not the content of the program is valid. In the main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S001). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S002), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S003). Then, the RAM 102 is set to an accessible state (step S005). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value of the specific register (I register) (1 byte) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not an output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch input via the input port of the I / O 105 is in an on state (step S006). The clear switch is mounted on a power supply board, for example. When the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is in the on state (step S007; YES), the CPU 103 executes a normal initialization process (steps S010 to S014).

  On the other hand, when the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is not in the on state (step S007; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the power supply stop process has been performed (step S008). The power supply stop process is a pachinko gaming machine 1 in order to restore the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the internal state of the gaming control microcomputer 100 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. This is a data protection process that temporarily backs up data such as the status of the data. Data backup is performed, for example, by storing data to be protected in a storage area (backup RAM area) of the RAM 102 to which power is supplied from a backup power source. Data backup may be performed by saving data in the backup RAM area when it is detected that power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been stopped. Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed can be determined, for example, based on whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area can be determined by, for example, the presence or absence of a backup flag that is set when data is backed up. Further, the determination can be made based on whether or not parity data is added to the backup RAM area. When it is determined that the power supply stop process is not being performed (step S008; NO), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process starting from step S010.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the power supply stop process has been performed (step S008; YES), the CPU 103 performs a parity check on the backup data stored in the backup RAM area, and whether the check result is OK. Is determined (step S009). In the process of step S009, the checksum calculated from the data stored in the RAM 102 when the power supply is stopped is compared with the checksum calculated and stored from the data backed up in the power supply stop process. The check result is judged based on the agreement between the two. If the power supply stop process is correctly performed, the checksum stored in the backup RAM area matches the checksum calculated from the data stored in the backup RAM area after the power supply is started. On the other hand, if the power supply stop process is not performed correctly, the two checksums do not match. The fact that the parity check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, the gaming state or the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped. When the parity check result is not OK (step S009; NO), the CPU 103 executes normal initialization processing that is executed when the power is turned on, which is not recovery by the power supply stop processing (step S010 to step S014).

  On the other hand, when the parity check result is OK (step S009; YES), the CPU 103 restores the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state when the power supply is stopped (processing of steps S41 to S44). I do. In step S41, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S41), and sequentially sets the contents of the backup setting table in the work area (area in the RAM 102) ( Step S42). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing in steps S41 and S42, the stored data remains as it is in the part of the work area that is not initialized. The part that is not initialized includes, for example, data indicating a gaming state at the time of stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), This is a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  After executing the process of step S42, the CPU 103 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S43), and sequentially stores the contents of the backup command transmission table in the work area (in the RAM 102). The command stored in the backup command transmission table can be transmitted. After executing the process of step S43, the CPU 103 transmits a power failure recovery designation command (9200H) as an initialization designation command at the time of power supply restoration (step S44). The CPU 103 may transmit the data backed up in the backup RAM area together with a power failure recovery designation command. Examples of the command to be transmitted together with the power failure recovery designation command include the variable display result command (8CXXH), the symbol determination command (8F00), the game state designation command (95XX), the hit start designation command (A0XX), and the These are a notification of opening a prize opening (A1XX), a notification after opening a big prize opening (A2XX), a command for specifying the number of time reductions (B3XX), a command for specifying the number of times of variation (B4XX), and the like. By transmitting these commands together with the power failure recovery designation command, it is possible to recover the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped. The CPU 130 that has received the power failure recovery designation command executes a predetermined power failure recovery process. The power failure recovery process may include an initial operation of the rendering device. After executing the process of step S44, the CPU 103 executes the process of step S015.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the clear switch is in the ON state (step S007; YES), when it is determined that the power supply stop process is not performed in the process of step S008 (step S008; NO), or step S009. When it is determined that the parity check result is not OK in the process (step S009; NO), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process starting from step S010. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S010). The data stored in the RAM 102 is initialized by the RAM clear process. The data to be initialized is, for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for determining per symbol. Data initialization sets the data value to 0, but a predetermined initial value may be set as the data, for example. Also, initialization is performed on all storage areas of the RAM 102. However, only a predetermined storage area of the RAM 102 may be initialized. As an area that is not initialized, for example, an area in which data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determination per normal symbol may be stored.

  After executing the process of step S010, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S011), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table to the initial values of the work area. (Step S012). By the processing in steps S011 and S012, for example, initial values are set for a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 set in the game control flag setting unit 152. Is done. In addition, initial values are set for various timers set in the game control timer setting unit 153 and used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, an initial value is set for a counter for counting a count value that is set for the game control counter setting unit 154 and used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, initial values are set for various buffers that are set in the game control buffer setting unit 155 and temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  After executing the processing of step S012, the CPU 103 sets the address of the initialization command transmission table in the pointer (step S013), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization command transmission table in the work area (area in the RAM 102). The command stored in the initialization command transmission table can be transmitted. After executing the process of step S013, the CPU 103 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 11 is mounted) such as the effect control board 12 (a microcomputer for game control). 100 notifies the sub-board that the initialization process has been executed, and the sub-board transmits a command for designating the execution of the initialization process to the sub-board (step S014). The CPU 103 may designate a target for executing the initialization process in the EXT data of the initialization designation command. For example, CPU 103 may specify an effect control pattern for selecting an initial operation of the effect device in the EXT data. Further, the CPU 103 may directly designate the initial operation of the effect device such as the image display device 5 or the movable accessory 173 in the EXT data. When CPU 130 receives the initialization designation command, CPU 130 executes the initial operation of the rendering device based on the initialization designation command.

  After executing the process of step S014 or after executing the process of step S44, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 104 (step S015). For example, the CPU 103 performs processing according to a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update a random value within a predetermined range of random numbers.

  Furthermore, in step S015, the CPU 103 sets a game control timer register so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms. The game control microcomputer 100 includes a CTC (counter / timer circuit). As the game control timer, a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 can be used.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S010 to S016) is completed, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the initial value random number update process (step S018) and the display random number update process (step S019) in the main process. When executing the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process, an interrupt prohibition process is executed (step S017), and an interrupt process by the game control timer is prohibited. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, an interrupt permission process is executed (step S020), and the interrupt disabled state is released. In the present embodiment, the display random number for which update processing is executed in step S019 is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is not a big hit, or whether to reach when it is not a big hit It is a random number to do. In the display random number update process, the count value of the counter for generating the display random number is updated. The initial value random number for which update processing is executed in step S018 is a count of a counter (ordinary symbol determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol. This is a random number for determining the initial value. In the initial value random number update process, the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number is updated. Above, description of the main process using FIG. 29 is complete | finished.

  Next, the game control timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a game control timer interrupt process. When the CPU 103 receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 30 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, thereby moving the normal symbol variable display and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. It is possible to enable transmission of the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table, for example, by turning it off. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated. This is the end of the description of the game control timer interrupt process using FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S15 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process (step S15) shown in FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a start winning process executed in steps S208 and S211 of the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number determination process executed in step S220 of the start winning process (step S208, step S211) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S101) shown in FIG. 32, the CPU 103 first uses a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in an ON state (step S201; YES), the first special figure reservation memory number (the first special figure game hold number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). As “4”) (step S202). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of first special figure hold storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; NO), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” ( Step S207).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; NO), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; YES). After executing the processing of step S209, the second start port switch is based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It is determined whether or not 22B is in an ON state (step S203). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step S203; YES), the second special figure reservation memory number (second special figure game hold number) is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, the upper limit memory number). As “4”) (step S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding memory number is not the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; NO), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S210).

  After executing the process of step S207, the start winning time process (FIG. 33) is executed (step S208), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S209), and the process of step S203 is performed. Proceed to After executing the process of step S210, the start winning time process (FIG. 33) is executed (step S211), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S212), and the start winning determination process is performed. Exit. Thereby, even if it is a case where the start winning of a game ball is detected at the same time in the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, the processing based on each detection can be completed.

  The CPU 103 performs updating so as to add 1 to the number of reserved special figure storage corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, as the start winning time process (steps S208 and S211) shown in FIG. S215). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of reserved storage is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S216). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  After executing the process of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S217). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit 151 corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S218). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S218, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (step S219). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is performed by, for example, executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interruption process shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

  Following the process of step S219, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S220). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (step S221). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is executed by executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 30 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. To the effect control board 12.

  As the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 confirms the state of the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152, for example, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A gaming state is specified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, for example, by confirming the state of the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. That is, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming state is in the high probability state, for example, when the probability variation flag is in the on state, depending on whether the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state or the off state. If the probability variation flag is in an off state, it is identified as a low probability state. In other words, the CPU 103 specifies which state the current gaming state is based on the state of the probability change flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152.

  Following the processing in step S401, table data corresponding to the current gaming state is set from the table data constituting the display result determination table 130A (step S402). When using different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) for the first special figure and the second special figure, the starting port buffer value is “1”. In some cases, the first special figure display result determination table is used, and when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table may be used. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. 33 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the big hit determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result decision table data set by the processing of step S402 are set. It suffices to determine whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the decision value with each other. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, when it is determined that the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 is determined to be “big hit” (big hit start determination) can do.

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; YES), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 determines in accordance with the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the start port buffer value. The big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is determined. Settings for transmitting the symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result of the process in step S409 to the effect control board 12 are performed (step S410).

  When it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; NO), or after any of the processing of step S410 is executed, the variation category is determined (step S412). That is, the variation category is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines a plurality of variable category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (a plurality of types of variable category determinations that are different from each other, such as the types of variable categories that can be determined in the variable category determination table and their determination ratios). One of the variation category determination tables to be set as the use table is selected from among the tables.

  Specifically, the CPU 103 uses a special figure display result (for example, the determination result of step S403) or the stored memory number (for example, the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). One of the variation category determination tables to be set as a use table is selected based on a certain first stored memory count value or the like. Subsequently, the CPU 103 converts the variable category determination table set as the use table and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variable category extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. Based on the plurality of types of variation categories, one of the variation categories is determined.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a selection example of the variation category determination table. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a variation category determination table. The configuration example of this variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables that are referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. FIG. 36A is a configuration example of a variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure) by a certain variation category determination table of the above four types. FIG. 36B is a configuration example of the variation category determination table based on another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL2” in the figure). FIG. 36C is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure). FIG. 36D is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on still another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure). For simplification of description, the variation category determination table in which the determination ratio is set as shown in FIG. 36A may be simply referred to as the variation category determination table in FIG. The same applies to FIGS. 36B to 36D and other determination tables such as a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 35 shows a selection example in which any setting is selected from the four types (setting “C-TBL1” to setting “C-TBL4”) of FIGS. This is a selection example in which any one of the variation category determination tables is selected from the four types of variation category determination tables.

  36 (A), the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” (the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 36B), the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. In the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in (D), numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 36A, 0 out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3 is the variation category. 70 (values in the range from “0” to “69”) are assigned to the variable category “PA2” and 27 (values in the range from “70” to “96”) are assigned to the “PA1”. Assigned to “PA3”, two (values in the range of “97” to “98”) are assigned to the variation category “PA4”, and one (value “99”) is assigned to the variation category “PA5”. Yes. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 36A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 36B, four (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 3 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 85 (values in the range of“ 4 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 36B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85 ÷ 100), The variation category “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 36C, 64 (“0”) out of 100 determined values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 63 ”) is assigned to the variation category“ PA1 ”, 25 (values in the range of“ 64 ”to“ 88 ”) are assigned to the variation category“ PA2 ”, and 8 (“ 89 ” ”To“ 96 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA3 ”, two (values in the range of“ 97 ”to“ 98 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PA4 ”, and one (value“ 99 ”) is assigned to the variable category“ PA5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table “CTBL3” in FIG. 36C, the fluctuation category “PA1” is 64% (64 ÷ 100), the fluctuation category “PA2” is 25% (25 ÷ 100), and the fluctuation category. “PA3” is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category “PA4” is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA5” is determined at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 36D, 20 (“0”) out of 100 determination values (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the random value MR3. ”To“ 19 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB3 ”, and 40 (values in the range of“ 20 ”to“ 59 ”) are assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB4 ”and 40 (“ 60 ” ”To“ 99 ”) is assigned to the fluctuation category“ PB5 ”. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 36D, the variation category “PB3” is 20% (20 ÷ 100), the variation category “PB4” is 40% (40 ÷ 100), The variation category “PB5” is determined at a rate of 40% (40 ÷ 100).

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 36A to 36C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, when the number of reserved memories is large, the shortened / non-reach ( Loss) The determination rate of the variation category (variation category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination rate “64%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “4”. > Determination ratio “4%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the reserved storage number is “3” or “2” > The determination ratio “0%” of the variation category “PA1” in the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the special figure display result is “losing” and the number of stored storages is “1”.

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 36A to 36C, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the super-reach (losing) variation category ( The determination ratio of the variation category “PA4” or the variation category “PA5”) is made constant. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the determination ratio “ 1% ”, and the decision rate“ 2% ”for the variable category“ PA4 ”.

  In the setting examples of FIGS. 36A to 36C, any one of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” is used. Even so, there is a determined value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same (common) variation category (the same variation category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random value MR3 is a certain value, it is any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is “99”, any of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, and the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” Also, the variation category “PA5” is determined. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “97” to “98”, the variation category “PA4” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables.

  Further, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “89” to “96”, the variation category “PA3” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. When the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “64” to “69”, the variation category “PA2” is determined in any of the above-described variation category determination tables. As a result, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value (a value in each of the above-described ranges), the reach, the super reach, the super reach α, and the super reach β are determined in advance. It can be easily determined. Accordingly, it is possible to notify them before the variable display corresponding to the start prize, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In the setting examples of FIGS. 36A to 36C, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, In either the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, the variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined. Thereby, it can be easily determined in advance whether at least the reach is not achieved.

  Then, after performing the setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 34B to the effect control board 12 according to the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S412 (step S412). S413), the winning random number determination process is terminated.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 in FIG. 31, the CPU 103 selects any of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. The special symbol normal process will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 6, a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command. The transmission setting process for transmitting etc. is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol special display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”. The setting of the variation pattern will be described later. In the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the variation pattern may be determined as follows. That is, the variation category is determined using the random number MR3 for determining the variation category stored in step S218 of the start winning process, similarly to step S412 of the winning random number determination process. Subsequently, based on the variation category as the determination result, one of the variation pattern determination tables to be set as the use table is selected from the plurality of variation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variation pattern determination table set as the use table and the numerical data indicating the newly extracted random number MR5 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern may be determined. In the start winning process, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the change category, the random value MR5 for determining the change pattern is extracted and stored, so that in the change pattern setting process in step S111, the start win is received. The variation pattern may be determined using the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern stored in the time process.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. The first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol game (special game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B The elapsed time is measured by a common timer regardless of whether the game is a graphic game). Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of step S112 only needs to be a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed (derived). A process for performing the setting is included. In addition, when the gaming state is other than the low probability low base state (normal mode), that is, in the case of one or both of the probability variation state (high probability state) and the short time state (high base state), , Processing for adding the counter value of the variation counter by the game control counter setting unit 154, processing for resetting, special figure in the probability variation state (high accuracy state), and special diagram in the short time state (high base state) Processing to determine whether or not the number of times the game has been executed has reached a predetermined number of times, and the probability variation control and time shortening control for controlling to one or both of the probability variation state (high accuracy state) and the time-short state (high base state) are terminated and low accuracy is achieved. The game state transition process at the time of change such as a process for setting one or both of the state and the low base state is also included.

  Then, a determination is made as to whether or not the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in an on state. Updated to When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “16R probability change big hit” or “8R probability change big hit”. As an example, corresponding to the jackpot type “16R probability variation jackpot”, the upper limit of the period during which the winning prize opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the opening of the winning prize opening which is the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. By setting the number of times to “16 times”, the normal open big hit state may be set. On the other hand, corresponding to the jackpot type “8R probability variation jackpot”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the number of opening of the big winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round is set. Is set to “8 times” so that the normal open big hit state may be set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is open has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for performing a setting for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, the movable accessory 173, the movable accessory 175, and the movable members 51 to 54. After a big hit, which will be described later, to set the process to wait until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect is executed elapses, or to start the probability variation control or the short-time control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state Game state transition processing and the like are included. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S231, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; NO), the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B stores the correspondence corresponding to the reservation number “1”. As data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted upward by one entry in the unit 151B. (Step S233). Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total reserved memory number count value stored in the total reserved memory number counter by one. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; YES), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure game is put on hold. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine.

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure holding storage number is “0”, the first special figure game and the second special figure are executed. When the game is put on hold, the second special game is executed with priority over the first special game. It should be noted that the second special figure game is not limited to being executed in preference to the first special figure game, and the game ball enters (passes through) the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening). ) And the special game (first special game, second special game) may be executed in the order in which the start prizes (first start prize, second start prize) are generated. In this case, it is only necessary to provide a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated, and to determine which of the first special game and the second special game is to be executed from the stored data.

  When the number of first special figure hold storage number is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; NO), the hold stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out (step S236). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151A is shifted upward by one entry. (Step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result, is “big hit” or “losing”. The data of the display result determination table is set (step S239) in the same manner as the process of step S402 of the winning random number determination process (step S220) shown in FIG. When different display result determination tables (first special figure display result determination table, second special figure display result determination table) are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, in the process of step S402, the start port buffer is used. The value (“1” or “2”) is referred to, but in the process of step S239, the variable special figure designation buffer value (“1” or “2”) may be referred to.

  Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determined values assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit” and “losing”. Then, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “lost” (step S240).

  After determining the special figure display result in step S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S241). And when it determines with it being a "hit" (step S241; YES), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting part 152 is set to an ON state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in this way, numerical data indicating the big hit type determining random number value MR2 stored in the random number buffer for variation is set to “16R probability variable big hit” and “8R probability variable big hit”. Depending on which of the determined values assigned to the jackpot type is matched, it is determined which of the plurality of types is the jackpot type (step S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is “16R probability variation big hit”, the big hit type buffer value may be “1”, and if “8R certain variation big hit”, it may be “2”.

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is not a “hit” (step S241; NO) or after performing any of the processes in step S245, the result of a prior decision as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, A confirmed special symbol is set corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot gaming state is set (step S248).

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In step S235, if the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; YES), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S250), and then the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  In the variation pattern setting process of step S111 following the special symbol normal process of step S110, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern.

  In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the variation category is determined in the same manner as the winning random number determination process (step S220). However, when the winning random number determination process (step S220) is executed and the variation pattern setting is performed. Even if the number of reserved memories differs greatly from the time of execution of the process (step S111), in the specific examples of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” shown in FIG. If the random number MR3 is “99”, for example, the variation category “PA5” is determined in both the winning random number determination process and the variation pattern setting process, regardless of the number of reserved memories. Also, if the random number MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of “97” to “98”, for example, the variation category “PA4” regardless of the number of reserved memories, both in the winning random number determination processing and the variation pattern setting processing. Is determined.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern. Note that the ROM 101 stores eight types of variation pattern determination tables corresponding to the variation categories. FIG. 38A is an example of setting a variation pattern determination ratio based on a variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA1 (abbreviation / non-reach loss)” among the above eight types. FIG. 38B is a setting example of the variation pattern determination ratio based on the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA2 (non-reach (loss))” among the above eight types. FIG. 38C is an example of setting the variation pattern determination ratio by the variation pattern determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above eight types. The same applies to FIGS. 38D to 38H.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is in an on state (step S291). If the big hit flag is in the on state (step S291; YES), the CPU 103 sets a big hit start production waiting time (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit start production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to step S292, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start specifying command is stored in the buffer specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. It only has to be stored in the area. Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag and turns it off (step S294). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S295), and ends the special symbol stop process.

  When the big hit flag is in the off state in step S291 (step S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs a gaming state transition process during variation (step S296). Subsequently, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to “0” that is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S297), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing gaming state transition process executed in step S296 of the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. In the changing gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 40, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the low probability low base state (step S451). CPU 103 determines that the current gaming state is the low probability low base state when both of the probability change flag and the short time flag provided in game control flag setting unit 152 are in the off state. If it is determined in step S451 that the current gaming state is the low probability low base state (step S451; YES), the CPU 103 ends the changing gaming state transition process as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S451 that the low-probability / low-base state is not established (step S451; YES), the value of the variation counter is incremented by 1 (step S452). The fluctuation number counter is the number of executions of the special-purpose game after being controlled to the low probability low base state, and is the number of times compared with the ST number (the number of probability variation) and the short time number. The ST count (number of times of probability change) is the number of times of execution of the special figure game for executing the probability change control. The number of time reductions is the number of executions of the special figure game for executing the time reduction control. The number of STs (the number of probability changes) and the number of time reductions are set in the hit end process (FIGS. 31 and 41).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S452, the CPU 103 reads the number of STs (the number of probability changes) (step S453) and reads the number of time reductions (step S454). Subsequent to the processing in step S454, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state) (step S455). When the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is in the high probability state. If it is determined in step S455 that the current gaming state is a highly probable state (step S455; YES), the CPU 103 indicates that the value of the variation counter is a value indicated by the ST count (probability variation count) read in step S453. It is determined whether or not the value is greater than (for example, 70 times) (step S456). When it is determined that the value of the variation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the ST number (the number of times of probability variation) (step S456; YES), the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. For example, the gaming state is set to a low probability state by turning it off (step S457), and the probability variation control is terminated.

  After executing the process of step S457, or when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the high probability state (step S455; NO), the value of the variation counter is larger than the value indicated by the ST count (probability variation count). If it is determined that it is not (step S456; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a high base state (time-short state) (step S458). When the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is in the on state, the CPU 103 determines that the current game state is the high base state (time reduction state). When it is determined in step S458 that the current gaming state is the high base state (short time state) (step S458; YES), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the variation counter is a value indicated by the short time number read in step S454. It is determined whether the value is greater than (for example, 70 times) (step S459). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter is larger than the value indicated by the number of time reductions (step S459; YES), the CPU 103 clears the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and enters the off state. For example, the gaming state is set to a low base state (step S460), and the time-shortening control is terminated.

  After the process of step S460, or when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the high base state (short time state) (step S458; NO), the value of the variation counter is indicated by the short time number and is not greater than the value. (Step S459; NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state has become a low probability low base state (step S461). When both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 are in the off state, the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state has become the low probability low base state.

  If it is determined in step S461 that the low-probability / low-base state has been reached (step S461; YES), the CPU 103 clears the set value of the ST count (probability change count) to “0” (step S462) and sets the short-time count. The value is cleared to “0” (step S463), the value of the variation counter is cleared to “0” (step S464), and the variation gaming state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S461 that the low probability low base state has not been reached (step S461; NO), the variation gaming state transition process is terminated without executing steps S462, S463, and S464.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of the special symbol process (step S15) shown in FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 41, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S311). As an example, in the big hit release post-processing (step S116) shown in FIG. 31, when the special figure process flag value is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit end presentation waiting time is set. A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S311, the CPU 103 updates, for example, by subtracting 1 from the game control process timer value, and whether the updated game control process timer value matches the predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined depending on whether or not.

  If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S311 (step S311; NO), the CPU 103 ends the big hit end processing as it is. On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S311 (step S311; YES), the CPU 103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S312). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to an on state, for example, and sets it to a high probability state (probability change state) (step S314). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets a short time flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to an on state, for example, and sets it to a high base state (step S315). That is, at the end of the big hit gaming state, the gaming state is set to a highly accurate and high base state by the processing of step S314 and step S315.

  Following the processing of step S315, the CPU 103 sets the set value of the ST count (probability change count) to 70 times (step S316) and sets the time reduction count to 70 times (step S317). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the value of the fluctuation number counter to “0” (step S318), and ends the big hit ending process.

  In the present embodiment, the setting value of the ST number (the number of times of probability variation) and the setting value of the time reduction number of 70 are set to the same value (both are 70 times). The number of times may be different from the set value of 70 times. In this embodiment, the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the ST count (probability change count) in the case of 16R probability change big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). However, the setting value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit may be different from the set value of the ST count (probability variation count) in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. In this embodiment, the setting value of the short time in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the short time in the case of 16R probability variation big hit are the same value (both are 70 times). The setting value for the number of time reductions may be different from the setting value for the number of time reductions in the case of 16R probability variation big hit. When the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1”, the CPU 103 determines that it is a 16R probability variable big hit, and when the jackpot type buffer value is “2”. May be determined to be an 8R probability variation big hit.

  As described above, in the main board 11, in the start winning determination process in step S101, transmission setting for transmitting the start opening winning designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed to the effect control board 12 ( In step S219), transmission setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the special symbol display result determined in step S403 or the like is performed (step S410), and the variation category command corresponding to the variation category determined in step S412 Is set for transmitting (step S413), and transmission setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command is performed (step S221). After these processes are executed, the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 30 is executed, so that the start winning ports (first start winning port, second start winning port) are set. When the game ball passes (enters) and the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, a start opening prize designation command (first start opening prize designation command or second start opening prize designation command), symbol designation command, Four commands, ie, a variable category command and a pending storage count notification command (a first pending storage count notification command or a second pending storage count notification command) are collectively transmitted as one set within one timer interrupt.

  In the main board 11, in the special symbol normal processing in step S110, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable symbol display result of the special symbol using the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, or the like. In the variation pattern setting process in step S111, the variation pattern of the decorative design is determined using the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, and the like.

  Further, in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the confirmed special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol determined as described above, and the like. Transmission settings for transmission to the effect control board 12 are performed. After these processes are executed, when the variable display is started by executing the command control process (step S17) of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. A variation pattern designation command or the like is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt. Note that the commands are not limited to those that are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt, and commands may be sequentially transmitted one by one by the command control process in step S17 for each timer interrupt.

  That is, at the timing when the special symbol or decorative symbol variable display is started, the special symbol normal processing (step S110) is performed, and the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set to “big hit” to control the big hit gaming state. In the variation pattern setting process (step S111), a specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative symbols is determined, and the contents determined by each effect control command are determined. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening), the winning random number determination process (step S220) is set as “big hit”. Determination of whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, determination of a general variable display mode (fluctuation category) of the decorative design, etc. are performed, and the contents determined by each presentation control command are transmitted to the presentation control board 12 Is done.

  In addition, when the big hit (8R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit), in the big hit end processing of step S117, both the ST number (the number of probability variation) and the number of time reductions are 70 times. Set to state. In addition, the variation counter is counted up in each variation when the gaming state is the high-probability base state (step S452), and the gaming state is in the low-probability state when the variation counter exceeds the ST number (probability variation number). (Step S457), and the gaming state is set to a low base when the variation counter exceeds the number of time reductions (step S460).

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the CPU 130 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 42 is started, the CPU 130 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71). At the initialization station, the CPU 130 confirms the reception of the initialization designation command from the main board 11 described with reference to FIG. 29, and initializes the rendering device based on the initialization designation command. As an initial operation of the effect device, for example, the image display device 5 performs an initial screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  After executing the processing of step S71, the CPU 130 clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, sets a register of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) mounted on the effect control board 12, and the like. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is in the off state (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waited.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the CPU 130 automatically sets the interruption prohibited. However, if the CPU that does not automatically enter the interruption prohibited state is used, It is desirable to issue a DI command. The CPU 130 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal serving as an effect control command or the like is taken from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the CPU 130 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; YES), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process in step S75, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the lamp 9, a movable accessory 173, a movable accessory 175, and a movable member. With respect to the control contents of the rendering operation using various rendering devices such as the driving operations 51 to 54, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

  Following the effect control process of step S75, an effect random number update process is executed (step S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S74 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 43, first, the CPU 130 checks whether or not there is a reception command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. Is determined (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; NO), the command analysis process is terminated.

  If there is a reception command in step S501 (step S501; YES), for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first start opening prize designation command. (Step S502). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (step S502; YES), a first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. That's fine.

  If the received command is not the first start opening winning designation command in step S502 (step S502; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step S504). If the command is the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; YES), a second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If the received command is not the second start opening winning designation command in step S504 (step S504; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in step S506 (step S506; NO), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If the received command is not a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step S508). When the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; YES), the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If the received command is not the first reserved memory number notification command in step S508 (step S508; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510). When the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; YES), the second pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). .

  If the received command is a symbol designation command in step S506 (step S506; YES), if the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; YES), or steps S503, S505, S509, S511. After executing any of the above processes, if the first pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command is After storing at the head of the empty area in the reception command buffer 194A at the time of 1 start winning (Step S512), the process returns to Step S501.

  Further, when the received command is a symbol designation command at step S506 (step S506; YES), when the received command is a variable category command at step S507 (step S507; YES), or steps S503, S505, S509. After executing any one of the processes of S511, if the second pending storage number notification waiting time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received immediately before the received command, the received command Is stored at the head of the empty area in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B (step S512), and the process returns to step S501.

  When the first reserved memory number notification command is received together with the first variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the first start winning prize reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A.

  Further, when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second variation start command, the reserved memory number notification command may not be stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B.

  If it is determined in step S510 that the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step S510; NO), the CPU 130 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern designation command (step S513). ). If it is determined that the command is a variation pattern designation command (step S513; YES), the CPU 130 stores the variation pattern designation command in a variation pattern designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S514). After executing the process of step S514, the CPU 130 returns to step S501 and executes the process.

  If it is determined in step S513 that the received command is not a variation pattern designation command (step S513; NO), the CPU 130 determines whether or not the received command is an initialization designation command (step S515). If it is determined that the command is an initialization designation command (step S515; YES), the CPU 130 stores the initialization designation command in an initialization designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S516). After executing the process of step S516, the CPU 130 returns to step S501 and executes the process.

  When it is determined in step S515 that the received command is not an initialization designation command (step S515; NO), the CPU 130 performs settings according to other received commands (step S517). For example, when the received command is a gaming state designation command, the CPU 130 may analyze the gaming state designation command and specify the current gaming state. When the received command is a hit end designation command, the CPU 130 may analyze the hit end designation command and specify whether or not the time is short. When the received command is a power failure recovery designation command, the CPU 130 may store the power failure recovery designation command in a power failure recovery designation command storage area formed in the RAM. After executing the process of step S517, the CPU 130 returns to step S501 and executes the process.

  Start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variation category command, reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command, second reserved memory number) An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start winning is generated as in the case of a notification command) is also referred to as a start winning command. Further, the first reserved memory number notification command, the second reserved memory number notification command, the first start opening prize designation command, and the second start opening prize designation command are also referred to as reserved storage information. The symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  When receiving commands are sequentially stored from the top of the empty area in the first start winning received command buffer 194A, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a first reserved memory count notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  In addition, when storing received commands sequentially from the beginning of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B, it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command, a variable category command, or a second reserved memory number notification command. The received commands may be stored without distinction, or may be stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area. This is the end of the description of the command analysis processing using FIG.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S75 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 44, the CPU 130 first executes a winning effect determining process (step S150). In the winning effect determining process, the CPU 130 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer (the first starting winning reception command buffer 194A or the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B), and the received command. As a process for determining whether or not a start opening winning designation command has been received, a process for determining a display mode (also referred to as a display mode at the time of addition) of a hold display when additionally displaying in the start winning memory display area 5H, etc. Is executed.

  After executing the winning effect determination process in step S150, the CPU 130 executes a movable accessory initial operation process (step S151). Details of the movable accessory initial operation processing in step S151 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the movable accessory initial operation process of step S151, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like, one of the following processes of steps S170 to 177 is performed. Select and execute.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is an initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. This includes processing for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the display device 5, processing for displaying processing for executing demonstration effects (customer waiting demonstration display), and the like. When it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbols in the image display device 5 In order to perform the variable display and other various production operations, the process of determining the fixed decorative design according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of the display result, or the first hold display or the second hold display is shifted and activated. Including a process for displaying a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, a process for determining various effects (for example, main notice effect), and the like. Yes. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the CPU 130 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process. The control data is read out, and various effect controls (for example, variable display control of decorative symbols during variable display of decorative symbols) are performed. Specifically, the CPU 130 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 based on the read control data (process data) and displays it on the screen, and a sound effect signal is output to the sound control board 13. Control for outputting and producing production sound from the speaker 8, control for turning on / off / flashing the light emitter units 71 to 74 and the lamp 9 by outputting an illumination signal to the light emitter control board 16C or the light emitter control board 16D, Various effect controls such as drive control of the movable members 51 to 54, the movable combination 173, and the movable combination 175 are executed.

  After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed completely stopped. If the final decorative design is displayed in a complete stop in response to the end code being read from the production control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the definitive decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. This waiting process per special figure includes a process of counting the number of STs (the number of times of probability change) and the number of time reductions, a process of updating the value of the production number counter, and a process of changing the gaming state according to the value of the production number counter. Can include. In this special symbol waiting process, the CPU 130 sets a fanfare effect when the stop symbol is a big hit symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “4”, and when the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol, The value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit start process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot start process is executed before the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened, and a fanfare effect is performed, or an effect (for example, when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened) (for example, This includes processing for setting an effect corresponding to a normal song, an effect corresponding to a special song, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The in-round process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. This in-round processing is executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state, and an effect when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song) For example, an effect corresponding to a normal song, an effect corresponding to a special song, or the like) is set. It includes processing to do. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

  The round post-process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. This round post-processing is executed when the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state. When a special winning opening releasing notification command is received from the main board 11, an effect to be executed when the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state (for example, an effect corresponding to a normal song or a special song) The effect process flag value is updated to “5”. When a hit end designation command is received from the main board 11, the ending effect is set and the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7”.

  The process after the big hit in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. This post-hit processing is executed before the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, and the processing for executing the ending effect, the processing for setting the gaming state, the ST number (the number of times of probability change), and the number of time reductions are set. Processing to be performed. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”.

  Next, the movable accessory initial operation process of step S151 in the effect control process process (step S75) of FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the movable accessory initial operation process.

  45, the CPU 130 determines whether the initialization designation command or the power failure recovery designation command is stored in the initialization designation command storage area or the power failure restoration command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Judgment is made (step S1511). The initialization designation command or the power failure recovery designation command is stored in the initialization designation command or the power failure restoration designation command stored in the initialization designation command storage area or the power failure restoration command storage area in step S516 or step S517 described in FIG. If it is determined that it has not been performed (step S1511; NO), the CPU 130 ends the movable accessory initialization process of step S151.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the initialization designation command or the power failure recovery designation command is stored (step S1511; YES), the CPU 130 determines whether or not the origin sensor 171A is in an on state (step S1512). The origin sensor 171A is a sensor that detects that the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position in the rotation direction.

  When it is determined that the origin sensor 171A is on (step S1512; YES), the CPU 130 determines whether the origin sensor 171B is on (step S1513). The origin sensor 171B is a sensor that detects that the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position in the opening / closing direction.

  When it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is in the on state (step S1513; YES), the CPU 130 performs processing for executing the initial operation A (step S1514). That is, the initial operation A is an initial operation that is executed when both the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are on. The initial action A may be set by, for example, an effect control pattern, and the CPU 130 may perform processing for executing the initial action A by selecting the effect control pattern in which the initial action A is set. Note that the initial operation B to the initial operation D, which will be described later, may be set to the effect control pattern selected by the CPU 130 as in the case of the initial operation A.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is not in the ON state (step S1513; NO), the CPU 130 performs processing for executing the initial operation B (step S1515). That is, the initial operation B is an initial operation that is executed when the origin sensor 171A is on and the origin sensor 171B is off.

  If it is determined in step S1512 that the origin sensor 171A is not in the on state (step S1512; NO), the CPU 130 determines whether the origin sensor 171B is in the on state (step S1516).

  When it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is in the on state (step S1516; YES), the CPU 130 performs processing for executing the initial operation C (step S1517). That is, the initial operation C is an initial operation that is executed when the origin sensor 171A is in an off state and the origin sensor 171B is in an on state.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is not in the ON state (step S1513; NO), the CPU 130 performs a process for executing the initial operation D (step S1518). That is, the initial operation D is an initial operation that is executed when both the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are off.

  After executing the process of step S1514, step S1515, step S1517, or step S1518, the CPU 130 ends the movable accessory initial operation process of step S151.

  It is assumed that the initial (initial) operation of the movable accessory 173 and the like described in this embodiment includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial operation refers to an initial operation in which the movable accessory 173 or the like is operated in the same manner as a normal performance operation. By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to check whether or not a defect occurs in the movable accessory 173 or the like in the normal performance operation. On the other hand, the short initial operation is an initial operation in which the movable accessory 173 or the like is operated while omitting a part of the normal performance operation. By performing the short initial operation, it is possible to check the operation of the movable accessory 173 and the like in a shorter time than when performing the long initial operation. In the present embodiment, the initial operation A to the initial operation D will be described as performing the initial operation in the short initial operation. However, the initial operation A to the initial operation D may be a long initial operation. Further, the initial operation A to the initial operation D may perform an initial operation that combines a short initial operation and a long initial operation. Details of the initial operation A to the initial operation D will be described later with reference to FIGS. This is the end of the description of the movable accessory initial operation process using FIG. Note that the movable members 51 to 54 may be subjected to the movable accessory initial operation process similarly to the movable members 173 and 175.

  Next, the variable display start waiting process executed in step S170 of the effect control process (step S75) shown in FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 46, the CPU 130 first determines whether or not a first change start command (or a second change start command) has been received (step S1000).

  When it is determined in step S1000 that the first variation start command (or the second variation start command) has not been received (step S1000; NO), the CPU 130 determines whether or not the demonstration effect flag is on ( Step S1002). The demonstration effect flag is a flag indicating whether or not a customer waiting demonstration display is being performed. When the demonstration performance flag is on (for example, the value “1”), this indicates that the customer waiting demonstration display is being performed, and when the demonstration performance flag is off (for example, the value “0”). Indicates that the customer waiting demonstration is not displayed. The value of the demonstration effect flag may be stored in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example.

  If it is determined in step S1002 that the demonstration effect flag is not on (step S1002; NO), the CPU 130 determines whether or not a customer waiting demonstration designation command is received (step S1004). If it is determined in step S1004 that no customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step S1004; NO), the variable display start waiting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1004 that a customer waiting demonstration designation command has been received (step S1004; YES), the demonstration performance flag is set to ON (step S1006), and the demonstration production (customer waiting demonstration display) is performed. Process data (effect control pattern) is selected (step S1008), and an effect control process timer is started (step S1010). Thereby, based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration production (customer waiting demonstration display) is started. Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the case where it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received in the variable display start waiting process in step S170 as a condition for starting the demonstration presentation has been described. The conditions are not limited to this. For example, the demonstration effect may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was stopped. Further, the demonstration effect may be started by detecting that the player is not in a gaming state by a sensor or the like.

  If it is determined in step S1002 that the demonstration effect flag is on (step S1002; YES), that is, if the demonstration effect has already been performed, the CPU 130 performs a predetermined operation (for example, the stick controller 31A or the push button). It is determined whether or not there is a predetermined operation such as 31B (step S1012). When it is determined in step S1012 that there is no predetermined operation (step S1012; NO), the CPU 130 executes a demonstration initial operation execution process (step S1014). Details of the initial operation execution process during the demonstration in step S1014 will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the initial operation execution process during demonstration in step S1014, the CPU 130 ends the variable display start waiting process in step S170. That is, when a predetermined operation using the stick controller 31A or the like is not performed during the demonstration production, the demonstration production is continued.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1012 that there is a predetermined operation (step S1012; YES), the CPU 130 executes menu processing (step S1013). The menu processing in step S1013 displays a menu on the image display device 5 and allows the player to perform an operation according to the menu contents. After executing the process of step S1013, the CPU 130 ends the variable display start waiting process of step S170.

  If it is determined in step S1000 that the first variation start command (or the second variation start command) has been received (step S1000; YES), the CPU 130 determines whether or not the demonstration effect flag is on ( Step S1022). If it is determined in step S1022 that the demonstration effect flag is on (step S1022; YES), that is, if the demonstration effect has already been performed, the demonstration effect flag is reset to the off state (step S1024). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S1026).

  After executing the process of step S1026, the CPU 130 turns off the initial operation execution flag (step S1027). The initial operation executed flag is a flag that is turned on when the initial operation is executed in the process of step S1014. When the variable display start waiting process of step S170 is ended, When the demonstration effect is executed, the initial operation of the movable accessory 173 or the like can be executed again. After executing the process of step S1027, the CPU 130 ends the variable display start waiting process of step S170.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1022 that the demonstration effect flag is not on (step S1022; NO), the process of step S1024 is omitted (it skips), and the value of the effect process flag corresponds to the variable display start setting process. After the updated value is updated to “1” (step S1026), the variable display start waiting process is terminated. Above, description of the variable display start waiting process of step S170 using FIG. 46 is complete | finished.

  Next, the details of the initial operation execution process during demonstration in step S1014 in the variable display start waiting process (step S170) in FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the initial operation execution process during the demonstration. The movable accessory initial operation process of step S151 described with reference to FIG. 45 is executed when an initialization designation command or a power failure recovery designation command is received from the main board 11, whereas the step illustrated in FIG. The initial operation execution process during the demonstration of S1014 is executed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the demonstration. That is, in the present embodiment, the case where the initial operation is performed at the timing when the power is turned on and other timings is illustrated. Accordingly, it is possible to check the malfunction of the movable accessory 173 and the like except when the power is turned on, and to return to the origin position even when the movable accessory 173 and the like are not at the origin position.

  In the initial operation execution process during the demonstration in step S1014 shown in FIG. 47, the CPU 130 determines whether or not the initial operation executed flag is on (step S10141). During the demonstration production, the initial operation is performed only once. The initial operation executed flag is a flag indicating that the initial operation has been performed in the initial operation execution process during the demonstration in step S1014 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts the demonstration effect. Therefore, when it is determined that the initial operation executed flag is on (step S10141; YES), the CPU 130 ends the initial operation execution process during the demonstration in step S1014. As described above, the initial operation execution completion flag is turned off in the process of step S1027 in the variable display start waiting process (step S170) of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the initial operation executed flag is not in the on state (step S10141; NO), the CPU 130 sets the initial operation executed flag to the on state (step S10143). The initial operation execution completion flag may be recorded in, for example, the presentation control data holding area 190 described with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S10142, CPU 130 determines whether or not origin sensor A is in an on state (step S10143). When it is determined that the origin sensor 171A is on (step S10143; YES), the CPU 130 determines whether or not the origin sensor 171B is on (step S10144).

  When it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is in the on state (step S10144; YES), the CPU 130 performs a process for executing the initial operation A (step S10145). On the other hand, when it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is not in the ON state (step S1513; NO), the CPU 130 performs processing for executing the initial operation B (step S1515).

  When it is determined in step S10143 that the origin sensor 171A is not in the on state (step S10143; NO), the CPU 130 determines whether the origin sensor 171B is in the on state (step S10147). When it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is in the ON state (step S10147; YES), the CPU 130 performs processing for executing the initial operation C (step S10148). On the other hand, when it is determined that the origin sensor 171B is not in the ON state (step S10147; NO), the CPU 130 performs a process for executing the initial operation D (step S10149). That is, the initial operation A is an initial operation that is executed when both the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are on. The initial operation B is an initial operation that is executed when the origin sensor 171A is on and the origin sensor 171B is off. The initial operation C is an initial operation that is executed when the origin sensor 171A is in an off state and the origin sensor 171B is in an on state. Furthermore, the initial operation D is an initial operation that is executed when both the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are in the OFF state.

  After executing the process of step S10145, step S10146, step S10148, or step S10149, the CPU 130 ends the initial operation execution process during the demonstration of step S1014.

  In the present embodiment, the initial operation A to initial operation D in FIG. 47 is exemplified as the same operation as the initial operation A to initial operation D in FIG. However, the initial operation performed in FIG. 47 may be different from the initial operations A to D in FIG. This is the end of the description of the initial operation execution process during the demonstration using FIG. It should be noted that the movable member 51 to 54 may perform the initial operation execution process during the demonstration, similarly to the movable members 173 and 175.

  Next, the first effect operation using the movable accessory 173 in the normal effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an example of the first effect operation using the movable accessory 173. 48 (A) to 48 (E) are time-series explanations of the rendering operation for operating the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172B.

  In FIG. 48 (A), the decorative symbols being variably displayed are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. It is assumed that the movable accessory 173 is stopped at the origin position in the lower left of the image display device 5 in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 1, it is assumed that the player can visually recognize a part of the movable accessory 173 at the origin position. The movable part 173 has a split piece 173B1, a split piece 173B2, and a split piece 173B3, and forms a predetermined figure (in a closed state) by combining the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3. It shall be. It is assumed that the movable accessory 175 is at the origin position above the image display device 5 in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 48B, the decorative symbol “7” is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, indicating that the reach state is reached. The movable accessory 173 is rotated by the actuator 172A to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 with the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 closed, and the decorative symbol display area 5C during variable display is displayed. Hide the decorative pattern.

  Next, in FIG. 48C, in the movable accessory 173, the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 are opened by the actuator 172B in the central portion of the display screen of the image display device 5. In order to open the fragment 173B1, the fragment 173B2, and the fragment 173B3, a predetermined space required when the fragment 173B1, the fragment 173B2, and the fragment 173B3 are opened is required. is there. When the movable accessory 173 is at the origin position shown in FIG. 48A, since there is no predetermined space, the split pieces 173B1, the split pieces 173B2, and the split pieces 173B3 cannot be opened. That is, the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 can be opened only when the movable accessory 173 is at the position shown in FIG. When the split pieces 173B2 and the split pieces 173B3 are opened, the decorative symbol display area 5C during variable display can be visually recognized by the player. FIG. 48C illustrates a case where a predetermined effect symbol is displayed in the symbol display area 5C during variable display.

  Next, in FIG. 48D, in the movable accessory 173, the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 are closed by the actuator 172B at the center of the display screen of the image display device 5. When the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 are closed, the symbol display area 5C during variable display is hidden again, and the player cannot visually recognize it.

  Next, in FIG. 48E, the movable accessory 173 is rotated by the actuator 172A and returned to the original position while the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 are closed. When the movable accessory 173 is returned to the origin position, the final stop symbol is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that FIG. 48E illustrates the case where the final stop symbol is a big hit, but the final stop symbol may be a big hit or a loss. Above, description of the 1st effect | action operation | movement using the movable accessory 173 in a normal effect using FIG. 48 is complete | finished.

  Next, the second and third effect operations using the movable accessory 173 in the normal effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example of second and third effect operations using the movable accessory 173. 49 (A) to 49 (E) are time-series explanations of performance operations for operating the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C. 49, FIG. 49 (C1) shows the second effect operation using the movable accessory 173, and FIG. 49 (C2) shows the third effect operation using the movable accessory 173. Is. Note that the second and third effect operations using the movable accessory 173 described with reference to FIG. 49 are the same as those in FIGS. 49A, 49B, and 49D, using FIG. 48 (A), FIG. 48 (B), and FIG. 48 (D) of the first effect operation described above are respectively the same effect modes, and a part thereof will be omitted in the following description.

  In FIG. 49 (A), in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol being variably displayed is displayed. In the lower left of the image display device 5 in FIG. 49A, the movable accessory 173 stops at the origin position. The split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 of the movable accessory 173 are in a closed state.

  Next, in FIG. 49 (B), the decorative symbols in the reach state are displayed in the decorative symbols display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5. The movable accessory 173 is rotated by the actuator 172A to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 with the split pieces 173B1, split pieces 173B2, and split pieces 173B3 closed, and the decorative symbol display area during variable display is displayed. Hide the 5C decorative pattern.

  Next, in FIG. 49 (C1), the movable accessory 173 moves laterally from the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 to the left side in the figure by the actuator 172C. The movable accessory 173 moved in the horizontal direction hides the decorative symbol display area 5L and displays the decorative symbol display area 5C so as to be visible to the player. That is, in the second effect operation using the movable accessory 173, it is assumed that an effect operation accompanied by lateral movement in the left direction of the movable accessory 173 is performed.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 49 (C2), the movable accessory 173 moves laterally from the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 to the right side of the figure by the actuator 172C. The movable accessory 173 moved in the horizontal direction hides the decorative symbol display area 5R and displays the decorative symbol display area 5C so that the player can visually recognize it. That is, in the third effect operation using the movable accessory 173, it is assumed that an effect operation accompanied by lateral movement in the right direction of the movable accessory 173 is performed.

  The second effect operation and the third effect operation using the movable accessory 173 are executed when any one of the effect operations is selected, and the second effect operation and the third effect operation are performed. It shall not be executed at the same time. 49 (C1) and 49 (C2) exemplify the case where the decorative symbol display area 5C that is variably displayed is simply displayed as the movable accessory 173 moves laterally. A specific effect image may be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 along with the lateral movement of 173.

  Next, in FIG. 49D, the movable accessory 173 is returned to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 from the position shown in FIG. 49C1 or 49C2 by the actuator 172C. When the movable accessory 173 is returned to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, the symbol display area 5C during variable display is hidden again.

  Next, in FIG. 49E, the movable accessory 173 is rotated by the actuator 172A and returned to the origin position. When the movable accessory 173 is returned to the origin position, the final stop symbol is displayed on the image display device 5. This is the end of the description of the second effect operation and the third effect operation using the movable accessory 173 in the normal effect using FIG.

  Next, a fourth effect operation using the movable accessory 175 in a normal effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of a fourth effect operation using the movable accessory 175. FIG. 50 (A) to 50 (C) are time-series explanations of presentation operations for moving the movable accessory 175 using the actuator 172C.

  In FIG. 50 (A), the decorative symbols being variably displayed are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. On the lower left side of the image display device 5 in FIG. 50A, the movable accessory 173 is stopped at the origin position. It is assumed that the movable accessory 175 is at the origin position above the image display device 5 in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 50B, the decorative symbol “7” is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5, indicating that the reach state is reached. The movable accessory 175 is lowered from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 by the actuator 172C. The lowered movable accessory 175 hides the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5C during variable display.

  Next, in FIG. 50C, the movable accessory 175 is raised by the actuator 172C and returned to the origin position. When the movable accessory 175 is returned to the origin position, the final stop symbol is displayed on the image display device 5. This is the end of the description of the fourth effect operation using the movable accessory 175 in the normal effect using FIG.

  Next, details of the actuator A and the actuator C that operate the movable accessory 173 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the actuator A and the actuator C that operate the movable accessory. In FIG. 51, the movable accessory 173 has movable mechanisms such as a rotation mechanism 173A and a slide mechanism 173C.

  First, the rotation operation of the movable accessory 173 by the rotation mechanism 173A will be described. The rotation mechanism 173A is rotated by the actuator 172A. The position shown in FIG. 51A is the origin position of the rotation mechanism 173A rotated by the actuator 172A. The origin position (a) of the rotation mechanism 173A is detected by the origin sensor 171A. The origin sensor 171A can detect that the rotating rotation mechanism 173A returns to the original position by detecting a part of the rotation mechanism 173A, for example.

  The movable accessory 173 at the origin position (a) is moved clockwise in the drawing to the position shown in FIG. 51 (b) shown by a broken line by the turning mechanism 173A rotated by the actuator 172A. The rotating mechanism 173A rotated to the position shown in FIG. 51 (b) is locked so as not to rotate any further by, for example, a mechanical locking member (not shown).

  51 (a) is the position of the movable accessory 173 shown in FIG. 48 (A). That is, the origin position shown in FIG. 51A is the lower left position of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. Further, the position shown in FIG. 51 (b) is the position of the movable accessory 173 shown in FIG. 48 (B). That is, the position shown in FIG. 51B is the position of the central portion of the display screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG.

  The actuator 172A rotates the rotation mechanism 173A between the origin position shown in FIG. 51A and the position shown in FIG. 51B. For example, the CPU 130 can control the actuator 172A so as to perform an effect operation in which the rotation mechanism 173A is simply reciprocated between the origin position in FIG. 51A and the position in FIG. Further, the CPU 130 may control the actuator 172A so as to perform an effect operation in which the rotation mechanism 173A is reciprocated a plurality of times between the origin position illustrated in FIG. 51A and the position illustrated in FIG. The CPU 130 may perform a plurality of effect operations by changing the number of times and the speed at which the rotation mechanism 173A is rotated. For example, the CPU 130 may selectively execute a strong operation for quickly rotating the rotation mechanism 173A multiple times and a weak operation for slowly rotating the rotation mechanism 173A once.

  Here, an origin return method for returning the rotation mechanism 173A using the actuator 172A and the origin sensor 171A to the origin position will be described. The origin position of the rotation mechanism 173A is a position where the rotation mechanism 173A is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 51 and the origin sensor 171A is first turned on. For example, when the origin sensor 171A is on before returning to the origin, the CPU 130 rotates the actuator 172A in the clockwise direction in FIG. 51 until the origin sensor 171A is turned off, and then moves the actuator 172A in the counterclockwise direction. When the origin sensor 171A is turned on, the actuator 172A is stopped when the origin sensor 171A is turned on, thereby returning the rotation mechanism 173A to the origin position. When the origin sensor 171A is in the off state before the origin return, the CPU 130 rotates the actuator 172A counterclockwise and stops the actuator 172A when the origin sensor 171A is in the on state. 173A is returned to the origin position. In the present embodiment, even if the rotation mechanism 173A rotates further counterclockwise from the origin position before returning to the origin, the rotation is mechanically locked and the origin sensor 171A is turned on. Shall be maintained.

  Next, the sliding operation of the movable accessory 173 by the slide mechanism 173C will be described. The slide mechanism 173C is slid in the lateral direction by the actuator 172C. The position shown in FIG. 51B is the origin position of the slide mechanism 173C slid by the actuator 172C. That is, the actuator 172C can slide in the lateral direction when the actuator 172A rotates clockwise and is in the position (b). The origin position (b) of the slide mechanism 173C is detected by the origin sensor 171C. The origin sensor 171C may detect the position of the slide mechanism 173C in the lateral direction by detecting, for example, a detection plate provided in the slide mechanism 173C.

  51. The movable accessory 173 in the position shown in FIG. 51 (a) is shown in the horizontal direction to the position shown in FIG. 51 (c1) or (c2) shown by a broken line by the slide mechanism 173C slid by the actuator 172C. Moved to. The slide mechanism 173C slid to the position shown in FIG. 51 (c1) or (c2) is locked so as not to slide any more, for example, by a mechanical locking member (not shown). The position shown in FIG. 51 (c1) is the position on the left side of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 49 (C1). 51 is a position on the right side of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 49 (C2).

  The actuator 172C slides the slide mechanism 173C between the position shown in FIG. 51B (b) and the position shown in FIG. 51 (c1) or (c2). For example, the CPU 130 can control the actuator 172C so as to perform an effect operation in which the slide mechanism 173C is simply reciprocated between the position (c1) or (c2) illustrated in FIG. 51 (b). Further, the CPU 130 may control the actuator 172C so as to perform an effect operation in which the slide mechanism 173C is reciprocated a plurality of times between the position illustrated in FIG. 51B and the position illustrated in FIG. 51C1 or FIG. . The CPU 130 may perform a plurality of effect operations by changing the number of times and the speed at which the slide mechanism 173C is slid. For example, the CPU 130 may selectively execute a strong operation for quickly sliding the slide mechanism 173C a plurality of times and a weak operation for slowly sliding the slide mechanism 173C once.

  Here, an origin return method for returning the slide mechanism 173C using the actuator 172C and the origin sensor 171C to the origin position will be described. It is assumed that the origin position of the slide mechanism 173C is a position at which the origin sensor 171C is first turned on when the slide mechanism 173C slides to the right in FIG. For example, when the origin sensor 171C is on before returning to the origin, the CPU 130 slides the actuator 172C to the left in FIG. 51 until the origin sensor 171C is turned off, and then slides the actuator 172C to the right. When the origin sensor 171C is turned on, the actuator 172C is stopped to return the slide mechanism 173C to the origin position. Further, when the origin sensor 171C is in the off state before the origin return, the CPU 130 slides the actuator 172C to the right and stops the actuator 172C when the origin sensor 171C is in the on state. Return to the home position. However, if the slide mechanism 173C is on the right side of the origin sensor 171C before the origin return, the origin sensor 171C is not turned on even if the actuator 172C is slid rightward. If the origin sensor 171C is not turned on within a predetermined time, the actuator 172C is slid to the left to confirm that the origin sensor 171C is turned on, and then the origin sensor 171C is turned on before the origin return described above. The slide mechanism 173C may be returned to the origin position by an operation when the state is in the state.

  Note that the rotation mechanism 173A may be disposed on the back side of the image display device 5, and move and move the movable accessory 173 from the back side of the image display device 5 with a magnet or the like. By disposing the rotation mechanism 173A on the back side of the image display device 5, it is possible to prevent the rotation mechanism 173A from obstructing the display screen of the image display device 5. Note that the opening / closing mechanism 173B described with reference to FIG. 52 and the lifting mechanism 173D described with reference to FIG. It may be held and moved by, for example. The description of the details of the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C for operating the movable accessory 173 using FIG.

  Next, details of the actuator 172B that operates the movable accessory 173 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of an actuator 172B that operates the movable accessory 173. In FIG. 52, the movable accessory 173 has a movable mechanism of an opening / closing mechanism 173B. The opening / closing mechanism 173B is opened / closed by an actuator 172B. 52A shows that the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in a closed state, and FIG. 52B shows that the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in an open state. The opening / closing mechanism 173B has three split pieces: a split piece 173B1, a split piece 173B2, and a split piece 173B3.

  52A, the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3 are combined in a closed state to form a predetermined shape. In FIG. 52A, the actuator 172B has a rotating circular gear (pinion), and a chopped flat plate (rack) connected to the split piece 173B1, the split piece 173B2, and the split piece 173B3, respectively. Are meshed with the rack 173B11, the rack 173B12, and the rack 173B13. The position in FIG. 52A is the origin position of the opening / closing mechanism 173B that is opened and closed by the actuator 172B. The origin position of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is detected by the origin sensor 171B. The origin sensor 171B can detect that the opening / closing mechanism 173B to be opened / closed is the origin position in the closed state by detecting a part of the rack 173B11.

  52A, when the actuator 172B is driven and the pinion rotates counterclockwise in the figure, the rack 173B11, the rack 173B12, and the rack 173B13 meshing with the pinion linearly in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure. Moving. The rack 173B11, the rack 173B12, and the rack 173B13 move linearly in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure, so that the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in the open state shown in FIG.

  The lower part of FIG. 52B shows a state where the rack 173B11, the rack 173B12, and the rack 173B13 have moved in the direction of the arrow shown in FIG. At this time, the split pieces 173B1, 173B2, and 173B3 connected to the rack 173B11, the rack 173B12, and the rack 173B13, respectively, are separated from each other as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 52 (B). Become. As shown in FIG. 48C, it is assumed that the center portion of the display screen of the image display device 5 is visible by opening the split pieces 173B1, the split pieces 173B2, and the split pieces 173B3. When the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in the open state, the origin sensor 171B is in the off state.

  Here, an origin return method for returning the opening / closing mechanism 173B using the actuator 172B and the origin sensor 171B to the origin position will be described. The origin position of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is a position where the origin sensor 171B is first turned on when the rack 173B11 of the opening / closing mechanism 173B rotates in the upward direction of FIG. 52 (B). For example, when the origin sensor 171B is in the on state before the origin return, the CPU 130 drives the actuator 172B until the origin sensor 171B is in the off state to rotate the pinion in the clockwise direction shown in the lower part of FIG. Next, the actuator 172B is driven to rotate the pinion counterclockwise, and when the origin sensor 171B is turned on, the actuator 172B is stopped to return the opening / closing mechanism 173B to the origin position. When the origin sensor 171B is in the off state before the origin return, the CPU 130 drives the actuator 172B to rotate the pinion clockwise to stop the actuator 172B when the origin sensor 171B is in the on state. As a result, the opening / closing mechanism 173B is returned to the origin position. In this embodiment, even when the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in a state of being further closed from the origin position before returning to the origin, the split pieces 173B1, the split pieces 173B2, and the split pieces 173B3 are brought into contact with each other and locked. The origin sensor 171B is assumed to be kept on. Above, description of the detail of the actuator 172B which operates the movable accessory 173 using FIG. 52 is complete | finished.

  Next, details of the actuator 172D that operates the movable accessory 175 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the actuator 172D that operates the movable accessory 175. As illustrated in FIG. In FIG. 53, a movable accessory 175 has a movable mechanism of an elevating mechanism 173D. The lifting mechanism 173D is lifted and lowered by the actuator 172D. The movable accessory 175 at the position shown in FIG. 53 (a) is moved in the vertical direction in the drawing to the position shown in FIG. The elevating mechanism 173D lowered to the position shown in FIG. 53 (b) is locked so as not to be lowered further by, for example, a mechanical locking member (not shown). 53 (b) is the center position of the display screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 50 (B).

  The actuator 172D moves the lifting mechanism 173D up and down between the position shown in FIG. 53A and the position shown in FIG. For example, the CPU 130 can control the actuator 172D so as to perform an effect operation in which the lifting mechanism 173D is simply reciprocated between the position illustrated in FIG. 53A and the position illustrated in FIG. Further, the CPU 130 may control the actuator 172D so as to perform an effect operation in which the elevating mechanism 173D is reciprocated a plurality of times between the position illustrated in FIG. 53A and the position illustrated in FIG. The CPU 130 may perform a plurality of presentation operations by changing the number of times and the speed at which the elevating mechanism 173D is moved up and down. For example, the CPU 130 may selectively execute a strong operation for moving the elevating mechanism 173D up and down a plurality of times quickly and a weak operation for moving the elevating mechanism 173D up and down slowly once.

  Here, an origin return method for returning the lifting mechanism 173D using the actuator 172D and the origin sensor 171D to the origin position will be described. The origin position of the elevating mechanism 173D is assumed to be a position where the elevating mechanism 173D is moved upward in FIG. 53 and the origin sensor 171D is first turned on. For example, when the origin sensor 171D is on before returning to the origin, the CPU 130 lowers the actuator 172D downward in FIG. 53 until the origin sensor 171D is turned off, and then raises the actuator 172D upward. When the origin sensor 171D is turned on, the actuator 172D is stopped to return the lifting mechanism 173D to the origin position. When the origin sensor 171D is in the off state before the origin return, the CPU 130 raises the actuator 172D upward and stops the actuator 172D when the origin sensor 171D is in the on state. Return to the home position. In the present embodiment, even when the lifting mechanism 173D is further raised from the origin position before returning to the origin, the rise is mechanically locked and the origin sensor 171D is maintained in the ON state. This is the end of the detailed description of the actuator 172D that operates the movable accessory 175, using FIG.

  Next, a long initial operation, which is one of the initial operations of the movable accessory 173 and the movable accessory 175, using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, the actuator 172C, and the actuator 172D will be described with reference to FIGS. . As described above, the long initial operation refers to an initial operation in which the movable accessory 173 and the like are operated in the same manner as a normal performance operation. By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to check whether or not a defect occurs in the movable accessory 173 or the like in the normal performance operation. The initial operation is executed subsequent to the operation of returning the origin of each actuator described above. In this embodiment, when a long initial operation is performed as an initial operation, the initial operation is always a constant operation regardless of the origin return operation of the actuator.

  In FIGS. 54 to 61, the operation of the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 is represented by arrows, and the drawings are simplified. The arrows shown in FIGS. 54 to 61 indicate the operation ranges of the respective actuators. The solid line arrows exemplify a case where each actuator moves from the origin to the operation end in the initial operation. In addition, the numbers in parentheses starting from (1) illustrated in each figure indicate the order of initial operations.

  First, the long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram illustrating an example of a long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172B. The long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172B described in FIG. 54 is the same as the first effect operation described using FIG.

  54 (1), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 which is the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A. 54 (2), the movable accessory 173 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B. In order to open the opening / closing mechanism 173B, as described above, the movable accessory 173 needs to be rotated to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 which is the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A. Therefore, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is executed at the rotation end even in the initial operation. In FIG. 54 (3), the movable accessory 173 is changed from the open state to the closed state by the opening / closing mechanism 173B. 54 (4), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A, and the long initial operation is completed.

  In the present embodiment, the case where each actuator is simply reciprocated as described above is exemplified as the long initial operation described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. However, in the long initial operation, the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175 may be operated a plurality of times, for example, in the same manner as the normal performance operation. Further, a predetermined sound effect may be output from the speaker 8 or the lamp 9 may be turned on in accordance with the operation of the movable accessory 173 or the movable accessory 175. This is the end of the description of the long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172B using FIG.

  Next, the long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating an example of a long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C. The long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C described in FIG. 55 is the same as the second effect operation described using FIG.

  In FIG. 55 (1), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 which is the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A. 55 (2), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the origin position to the slide end in the left direction in the figure by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C. In FIG. 55 (3), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the slide end in the left direction to the origin position by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C. In FIG. 55 (4), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A, and the long initial operation ends. Above, description of the long initial operation | movement of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C using FIG. 55 is complete | finished.

  Next, the long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing another example of the long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C. The long initial operation of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C described in FIG. 56 performs the same operation as the third effect operation described using FIG.

  In FIG. 56 (1), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 which is the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A. 56 (2), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the origin position to the slide end in the right direction in the figure by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C. 56 (3), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the slide end in the right direction to the origin position by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C. In FIG. 56 (4), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A, and the long initial operation ends.

  In the present embodiment, the long initial operation is intended to check whether or not a malfunction occurs in the movable accessory by the same operation as the normal production operation, and therefore, the initial operation described with reference to FIG. It is assumed that the initial operations described in FIG. 56 are performed separately. Above, description of the long initial operation | movement of the movable accessory 173 using the actuator 172A and the actuator 172C using FIG. 56 is complete | finished.

  Next, a long initial operation of the movable accessory 175 using the actuator 172D will be described. The long initial operation of the movable accessory 175 using the actuator 172D is the same as the fourth effect operation described with reference to FIG.

  First, the movable accessory 175 is lowered from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 which is the lower end by the lifting mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D. Next, the movable accessory 175 is raised from the descending end to the origin position by the elevating mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D, and the long initial operation is completed. This is the end of the description of the long initial operation of the movable accessory 175 using the actuator 172D.

  Note that the initial operation described in FIGS. 54 to 56 and the initial operation using the actuator 172D may be executed sequentially. The order of initial operations executed at that time is arbitrary. For example, after the initial operation shown in FIG. 54 is executed, the initial operation shown in FIG. 55, the initial operation shown in FIG. 55, and the initial operation using the actuator 172D may be executed in this order.

  Next, details of the initial operation A to the initial operation D described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 47 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. The initial operation A to the initial operation D are short initial operations of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 using the actuator 172A, the actuator 172B, the actuator 172C, and the actuator 172D. As described above, the short initial operation refers to an initial operation in which the movable accessory 173 or the like is operated by omitting a part of the normal performance operation. By performing the short initial operation, it is possible to check the operation of the movable accessory 173 and the like in a shorter time than when performing the long initial operation. In the present embodiment, when the short initial operation is performed as the initial operation, the initial operation is performed in the modes of the initial operation A to the initial operation D according to the mode of the origin return operation of the actuator.

  In FIGS. 57 to 61, arrows when the movable mechanisms move from the origin position to the operating end are indicated by solid lines. In addition, an arrow when each movable mechanism moves until the origin sensor that detects each movable mechanism moves from the on state to the off state, and an arrow when the origin sensor moves from the off state to the on state. Is represented by a broken line. The operation in which each movable mechanism moves until the origin sensor that detects each movable mechanism moves from the on state to the off state and then moves until the origin sensor turns on again is referred to as a short initial operation. By performing the short initial operation, the moving distance of the movable mechanism is shortened, and the operation confirmation time can be shortened. Further, the origin return operation when each movable mechanism moves by the origin return operation is indicated by a dotted line with an arrow. In addition, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 8 or the lamp 9 is turned on in accordance with the initial operations A to D of the movable combination 173 and the movable combination 175 described with reference to FIGS. May be.

  First, the operation of the initial operation A of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the initial operation A of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D. The initial operation A is an initial operation that is executed when the operation mode of the origin return operation is a mode in which the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B do not perform the origin return operation. If the origin sensor 171A for detecting the origin of the rotation mechanism 173A is on and the origin sensor 171B for detecting the origin of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is on before executing the initial operation, the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B do not need to perform an origin return operation. However, the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B may not be accurately at the origin position even if the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are in the on state. Therefore, in the initial operation A, even if the origin sensor 171A and the origin sensor 171B are in the on state, the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B are moved to the correct origin position by performing a predetermined initial operation. Can do. 57 to 60, the origin sensor 171D for detecting the origin of the elevating mechanism 173D is in an ON state before executing the initial operation, and the movable accessory 175 performs the initial operation by the short initial operation. To do.

  57 (1) and (2), the movable accessory 175 performs a short initial operation as shown by a broken line in the drawing by an elevating mechanism 173D operated by an actuator 172D. In FIG. 57 (3), the movable accessory 173 is moved from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A, as shown by the solid line in the drawing. It is rotated. In order to open / close the opening / closing mechanism 173B, it is necessary to move the rotation mechanism 173A to the rotation end, and therefore the rotation mechanism 173A does not perform the short initial operation and rotates to the rotation end. 57 (4) and (5), the movable accessory 173 performs a short initial operation as shown by a broken line by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B. 57 (6), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A, and the initial operation A is completed. Above, description of operation | movement of the initial operation | movement A of a movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D using FIG. 57 is complete | finished.

  Next, the operation of the initial operation B of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the initial operation B of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D. The initial operation B is an initial operation executed when the operation mode of the origin return operation is a mode in which the rotation mechanism 173A does not perform the origin return operation and the opening / closing mechanism 173B performs the origin return operation. If the origin sensor 171A for detecting the origin of the rotation mechanism 173A is on before executing the initial operation, the rotation mechanism 173A does not need to perform the origin return operation. On the other hand, when the origin sensor 171B that detects the origin of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in the OFF state, the opening / closing mechanism 173B needs to perform an origin return operation. The rotation mechanism 173A may not be accurately at the origin position even if the origin sensor 171A is on. Therefore, in the initial operation B, even if the origin sensor 171A is in the ON state, the rotation mechanism 173A can be moved to an accurate origin position by performing a predetermined initial operation. In addition, since the opening / closing mechanism 173B that performs the origin return operation can be moved to the correct origin position by the origin return operation, it is possible to omit the execution of the initial operation and to check the operation of the opening / closing mechanism 173B.

  In FIG. 58 (1), the movable accessory 173 performs an origin return operation as shown by the dotted line in the drawing by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B. 58 (2) and (3), the movable accessory 175 performs a short initial operation as shown by the broken line in the drawing by the elevating mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D. 58 (4) and (5) in FIG. 58, the movable accessory 173 performs a short initial operation as shown by a broken line in the drawing by the rotating mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A. In the initial operation B, since the opening / closing mechanism 173B does not perform the opening operation, it is not necessary to move the rotation mechanism 173A to the rotation end. Therefore, the time for checking the operation of the rotation mechanism 173A can be shortened by the short initial operation. The description of the operation of the initial operation B of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D using FIG.

  Next, the operation of the initial operation C of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the initial operation C of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D. The initial operation C is an initial operation that is executed when the operation mode of the home return operation is a mode in which the rotation mechanism 173A performs the home return operation and the opening / closing mechanism 173B does not perform the home return operation. If the origin sensor 171A that detects the origin of the rotation mechanism 173A is in the OFF state before the initial operation is performed, the rotation mechanism 173A needs to perform an origin return operation. On the other hand, when the origin sensor 171B that detects the origin of the opening / closing mechanism 173B is in the ON state, the opening / closing mechanism 173B does not need to perform the origin return operation. The opening / closing mechanism 173B may not be accurately at the origin position even if the origin sensor 171B is in the on state. Therefore, in the initial operation C, even when the origin sensor 171B is in the ON state, the opening / closing mechanism 173B can be moved to an accurate origin position by performing a predetermined initial operation. The rotation mechanism 173A that performs the origin return operation can move to the correct origin position by the origin return operation, but performs an initial operation that rotates from the origin position to the rotation end in order to perform the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing mechanism 173B.

  In FIG. 59 (1), the movable accessory 173 performs an origin return operation as shown by a dotted line in the drawing by a rotating mechanism 173A operated by an actuator 172A. 59 (2) and (3) shown in FIG. 59, the movable accessory 175 performs a short initial operation as shown by the broken line in the drawing by the elevating mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D. In FIG. 59 (4), the movable accessory 173 is moved from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A, as shown by the solid line in the drawing. It is rotated. In order to open / close the opening / closing mechanism 173B, it is necessary to move the rotation mechanism 173A to the rotation end, and therefore the rotation mechanism 173A rotates to the rotation end even when the origin is returned. 59 (5) and (6) shown in FIG. 59, the movable accessory 173 performs a short initial operation as shown by a broken line by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B. 59 (7), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A, and the initial operation C is completed. Above, description of operation | movement of the initial operation | movement C of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D using FIG. 59 is complete | finished.

  Next, the operation of the initial operation D of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example of the operation of the initial operation D of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D. The initial operation D is an initial operation that is executed when the operation mode of the home position return operation is a mode in which the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B perform the home position return operation. If the origin sensor 171A for detecting the origin of the rotation mechanism 173A and the origin sensor 171B for detecting the origin of the opening / closing mechanism 173B are in the OFF state before the initial operation is performed, the rotation mechanism 173A performs the origin return operation. Need to do. Therefore, in the initial operation D, the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B are caused to return to the origin, and the initial operations of the rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B are omitted.

  In FIG. 60 (1), the movable accessory 173 performs an origin return operation as shown by a dotted line in the drawing by an opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by an actuator 172B. In FIG. 60 (2), the movable accessory 173 performs an origin return operation as shown by a dotted line in the drawing by a rotating mechanism 173A operated by an actuator 172A. 60 (3) and (4) in FIG. 60, the movable accessory 175 performs a short initial operation as shown by the broken line in the drawing by the elevating mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D. Above, description of the operation | movement of the initial operation | movement D of the movable accessory using the actuator A, the actuator B, and the actuator D using FIG. 60 is complete | finished.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the coupling of the initial operations of the actuator A, the actuator B, the actuator C, and the movable object using the actuator will be described. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating an example of coupling of the initial operations of the movable combination using the actuator A, the actuator B, the actuator C, and the actuator. In the combination of the initial operations, a plurality of initial operations of the movable accessory are combined to suppress a time required for confirming the plurality of operations, thereby executing a suitable initial operation. In the present embodiment, the case where the slide operation of the slide mechanism 173C in the long initial operation described in FIGS. 55 and 56 is combined to suppress the time of the initial operation related to the slide mechanism 173C is illustrated.

  In FIG. 61 (1), the movable accessory 173 is moved from the origin position to the center of the display screen of the image display device 5 as the rotation end by the rotation mechanism 173A operated by the actuator 172A, as indicated by the solid line in the figure. It is rotated. In FIGS. 61 (2) and (3), the movable accessory 173 performs a short initial operation as shown by the broken line by the opening / closing mechanism 173B operated by the actuator 172B.

  In FIG. 61 (4), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the origin position to the slide end in the right direction in the figure by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C. 61 (5), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the slide end in the right direction in the drawing to the slide end in the left direction in the drawing by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C. In FIG. 61 (6), the movable accessory 173 is slid from the slide end in the left direction to the origin position by the slide mechanism 173C operated by the actuator 172C. 61 (4) to (5) is a combination of the sliding operations shown in FIGS. 55 (2) and (3) and the sliding operations shown in FIGS. 56 (2) and (3). By combining the slide operation, the time required for the initial operation can be reduced as compared with the case where the right slide operation and the left slide operation are performed in separate initial operations.

  In FIG. 61 (7), the movable accessory 173 is rotated from the rotation end to the origin position by the rotation mechanism 173A. 61 (8) and (9) shown in FIG. 61, the movable accessory 175 performs a short initial operation as shown by the broken line in the drawing by the elevating mechanism 173D operated by the actuator 172D and ends the initial operation. The description of the coupling of the initial operations of the movable combination using the actuator A, the actuator B, the actuator C, and the actuator using FIG.

  As described above, the embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  (1) For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 or the like), and a movable accessory (for example, FIG. 51). The return operation (returning mechanism 173A of the movable accessory 173, opening / closing mechanism 173B or slide mechanism 173C, lift mechanism 173D of the movable accessory 175, etc.) whose operation is controlled by the CPU 130, etc. For example, the operation of returning to the origin position whose operation is controlled by the CPU 130 shown in FIGS. 57 to 60 is performed, and the mode of the return operation (for example, the rotation mechanism 173A in FIG. 57 or FIG. 59 and 60, the rotation mechanism 173A performs the return to origin operation, and the opening / closing mechanism 173B in FIG. A mode according to a mode in which the return operation is not performed and a mode in which the opening / closing mechanism 173B performs the return to origin operation in FIG. 58 or 60 (for example, in FIGS. 57 to 60, the rotation mechanism 173A or the opening / closing mechanism 173B is the origin An initial operation of the movable accessory (for example, an aspect in which an initial operation is not performed when the return operation is performed, or an initial operation is performed when the rotation mechanism 173A or the opening / closing mechanism 173B does not perform an origin return operation) 57 to 60) (for example, including a mode that does not perform the initial operation shown in FIG. 60), a gaming machine that can execute a suitable initial operation is exemplified. Such a gaming machine is not limited to this.

  For example, in this embodiment, when performing an origin return operation for returning the movable accessory to the origin position, the initial operation is not performed (the following pattern A), and when the origin return operation is not performed, the short initial is performed ( Although the following pattern F) is illustrated, the patterns A to H as described below may be combined with the origin return operation mode and the initial operation mode of the movable accessory in the initial operation.

Pattern A Home return operation + No initial operation Pattern B Home return operation + Short initial operation Pattern C Home return operation + Short initial operation + Long initial operation Pattern D Home return operation + Long initial operation Pattern E No home return operation + No initial operation Pattern F No homing operation + short initial operation Pattern G No homing operation + short initial operation + long initial operation Pattern H No homing operation + long initial operation

  In addition, as shown in the pattern A and the pattern E, the operation mode of the initial operation may include a case where the initial operation is not performed. In the above pattern, the origin return operation, the short initial operation, and the long initial operation have been described separately, but for example, the origin return operation includes a short initial operation. Also good. That is, the operation mode of the long initial operation may be executed according to the operation mode of the origin return operation including the short initial.

  The patterns A to H may be used in the initial operation when the power is turned on and the initial operation during the demonstration. For example, different patterns may be used for the initial operation when the power is turned on and the initial operation during the demonstration. Further, the same pattern may be used in the initial operation when the power is turned on and the initial operation during the demonstration. In addition, the pattern used in the initial operation at power-on and the initial operation during the demonstration may be a predetermined pattern, or one pattern is selected from a plurality of patterns according to a predetermined condition. It may be a thing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the short initial operation performs one operation is illustrated, but the short initial operation may be performed by selecting an operation mode from a plurality of operation modes. For example, a predetermined operation mode may be selected from a plurality of operation modes according to the mode of the origin return operation. The predetermined operation mode of the short initial is different in the production mode such as the moving distance, the moving speed, the number of times of movement, the operating time, the sound effect output from the speaker 8 and the lighting pattern of the lamp 9. There may be. Similarly, in the present embodiment, the case where the long initial operation performs one operation is illustrated, but the long initial operation may be performed by selecting an operation mode from a plurality of operation modes. For example, a predetermined operation mode may be selected from a plurality of operation modes according to the mode of the origin return operation or the mode of the short initial operation. Furthermore, in the initial operation pattern executed by combining the short initial operation and the long initial operation, the short initial operation and the long initial operation are performed by selecting a combination of operation modes from a plurality of operation mode combinations. Also good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the initial operation is performed at the time of power-on and during the demonstration is illustrated, but the initial operation may be performed at other timing. For example, the initial operation may be a timing when the gaming machine satisfies a predetermined condition. The timing that satisfies the predetermined condition is, for example, a timing that is not limited to during the demonstration, and may be when a predetermined time has elapsed after the suspension of fluctuation. The predetermined time after the fluctuation stop may be, for example, one hour after the fluctuation stop. Further, the predetermined time after the fluctuation stop may be immediately after the fluctuation stop. Moreover, the timing which satisfy | fills a predetermined condition may be after a fluctuation | variation start. The timing that satisfies the predetermined condition may be, for example, a timing immediately after the start of fluctuation. Moreover, it may be just before the super reach production etc. is performed after the fluctuation start. The initial operation may be executed at an arbitrary timing when a player or hall clerk performs a predetermined operation.

  (2) Also, in the gaming machine of (1) above, when the movable accessory is at the origin position before the return operation (for example, the origin sensor 171A shown in FIG. 51 or the origin sensor 171B shown in FIG. 52 is (For example, in the ON state) that performs the initial operation of the movable accessory (for example, the rotation mechanism 173A shown in FIG. 57 operates in the operations (3) and (6), and the opening / closing mechanism 173B has (4 ) And (5) may be an initial operation, etc., and according to such a gaming machine, even in the case of a movable accessory at the origin position from the beginning, the operation can be confirmed in the initial operation. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to this.

  (3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2), the movable accessory that has performed the return operation does not perform the initial operation (for example, the operation (2) shown in FIG. 60 was performed). The rotation mechanism 173A and the opening / closing mechanism 173B that performed the operation of (1) may not perform the initial operation), and according to such a gaming machine, by suppressing the time required for the operation check Although a case where a suitable initial operation can be executed has been illustrated, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to this.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), the movable accessory that has performed the return operation (for example, the rotating mechanism that has performed the return operation (1) in FIG. 59). 173A and the like (for example, the operations of (4) and (7) of the rotation mechanism 173A in FIG. 59) are the initial operations (for example, of the opening / closing mechanism 173B shown in FIG. 59). (5) and (6), etc.), and according to such a gaming machine, a case where a suitable initial operation according to the situation can be executed is illustrated. The gaming machine according to is not limited to this.

  (5) Further, in any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (4), after performing the initial operation, a confirmation operation of the movable accessory corresponding to the rendering operation (for example, shown in FIGS. 54 to 56) , A rotary mechanism 173A, an opening / closing mechanism 173B or a slide mechanism 173C of the movable accessory 173, and a long initial operation of the elevating mechanism 173D of the movable accessory 175). For example, the case where the confirmation operation can be suitably confirmed by confirming the operation of the movable accessory by the short initial operation before confirming the production operation by the long initial operation is illustrated. The gaming machine is not limited to this.

  (6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4), the return operation is performed when the power is turned on (for example, the movable accessory initial stage of step S151 executed by the CPU 130 shown in FIG. 45). 47 may be performed at a timing other than when the operation process is executed (for example, the timing at which the initial operation execution process during the demonstration in step S1014 executed by the CPU 130 shown in FIG. 47 is executed) According to such a gaming machine, the case where the opportunity of confirming the malfunction of a movable accessory increases and the malfunction of production | presentation operation | movement can be suppressed was illustrated, However, The gaming machine which concerns on this invention is not limited to this.

  (7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5), the initial operation is a mixture of a plurality of operations (for example, a slide mechanism 173C controlled by the CPU 130, as shown in FIG. 61 (2) and (3) shown in FIG. 61 and (4) to (6) left / right slide operation, etc., which are mixed with the left slide operation shown in FIG. 61 and the right slide operation shown in FIG. According to such a gaming machine, the case where a suitable initial operation can be executed by suppressing the time required for confirming a plurality of operations of the movable accessory has been exemplified, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is limited to this. Not.

  Further, the program and data for realizing the present embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance You may take the form distributed by pre-installing in storage devices, such as a computer apparatus. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  In addition, the game execution form is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the change is started in order to notify the change control pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect and the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream to the effect control microcomputer. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer using two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slide effect, etc. (2) Before the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode is transmitted, and the second command is the so-called second in the case where the reach is reached (such as the reach type, the presence / absence of the re-lottery effect). You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after a stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. In the game control microcomputer, the change time is notified by each of the two commands, and a specific change mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control microcomputer. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the “ratio” is, for example, a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0% is included in the relationship (that is, one is assigned 100% and the other is assigned 0%).

  Further, the device configuration, data configuration, processing shown in the flowchart of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various rendering operations including the rendering operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5, and the like do not depart from the spirit of the present invention. Any change and correction is possible.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine in which a gaming ball is paid out as a prize to the player, and the player launches the paid gaming ball into the gaming area to play a game. A game score for use in a game is given using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from the record information of a game recording medium such as a member card, and a given game score or game The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by using a game score given by winning a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the gaming area.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosing game machine that encloses a game medium such as a ball and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a gaming machine is shown that is controlled to a probable change state after the jackpot game is ended based on the determination that the probable change jackpot has been determined. However, the present invention is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in each of the above embodiments can be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after the completion.

  In addition, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable and deriving and displaying the display result is provided. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not zero, The game ball enclosed in the game is driven into the game area, the game is performed, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being driven, and the game score is awarded according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds the values. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  In the above embodiment, a gaming machine that performs variable display of a plurality of types of special symbols each identifiable and derives and displays a definite special symbol that is a variable display result has been shown. It is not limited. For example, the changing special symbol may be different from the confirmed special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, the fixed special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result may not be included in the plurality of types of special symbols that fluctuate.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a gaming machine that performs variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can each be identified and derives and displays a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result has been shown. It is not limited. For example, the decorative pattern that fluctuates may be different from the fixed decorative pattern that is derived and displayed as a variable display result. In other words, the fixed decorative symbols derived and displayed as the variable display result may not be included in the plurality of types of decorative symbols that change.

  In each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is shown as a gaming machine. However, a predetermined number of wagers are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. A slot that can execute a game (game) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the stop button operation by the player The present invention can also be applied to a machine (for example, a slot machine equipped with one or more of a big bonus, a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus)).

  For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a slot machine as described above, and is a movable accessory that performs an operation (for example, a movable accessory provided in the slot machine. It is stored in the vicinity of the liquid crystal screen provided in the machine, and when specified (for example, during production), the movable position that moves to the front of the liquid crystal screen is stored at the origin position (for example, in the vicinity of the liquid crystal screen in the above-described normal state). In the case of a movable accessory that moves to the front of the liquid crystal screen at a specific time, a slot machine that performs a return operation to return to the storage position and the like and performs an initial operation of the movable accessory in a manner according to the mode of the return operation. It may be.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Game board 3 Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5HL First start prize memory display area 5HR Second start prize memory display area 5H Start prize memory display area 6A Normal prize ball device 6B Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8 Speaker 9 Lamp 9a Ceiling LED
9b Left frame LED
9c Right frame LED
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Audio | voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 16A Production control relay board 16B Drive control board 16C-16F Light-emitting body control board 20 Normal symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A 1st start switch 22B Second start port switch 23 Count switch 31A Stick controller 31B Push button 50 Production movable mechanism 51-54 Movable member 60A-60C Motor for operation 61 Movable member position sensor 71-74 Light emitting unit 100 Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ROM
102, 122 RAM
103 CPU
104 Random number circuit 105 I / O
120 Production control microcomputer 130 CPU
172A to 172D Actuator 173A Rotating mechanism 173B Opening / closing mechanism 173C Slide mechanism 173D Lifting mechanism 411, 413a to 413c Luminescent body driver 412 Motor drive driver 412A Actuator drive driver

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
Control means for controlling electrical components;
Output means for outputting a specific signal for driving an electrical component in response to a control signal by the serial communication method from the control means;
The output means outputs a specific signal by a parallel communication system from a specific signal output unit grouped into a plurality of different groups,
The output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit is different for each group,
Performs a return operation to return the movable accessory performing the operation to the origin position,
The game machine characterized by performing an initial operation of the movable accessory in a mode corresponding to the mode of the return operation.

Images